Casio ClassPad 330 User Manual

Casio ClassPad 330 User Manual

Classpad os version 3.03
Hide thumbs Also See for ClassPad 330:
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

ClassPad 330
User's Guide
CASIO Education website URL
http://edu.casio.com
ClassPad website URL
http://edu.casio.com/products/classpad/
ClassPad register URL
http://edu.casio.com/dl/
ClassPad OS Version 3.03
E

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Summary of Contents for Casio ClassPad 330

  • Page 1 ClassPad 330 ClassPad OS Version 3.03 User’s Guide CASIO Education website URL http://edu.casio.com ClassPad website URL http://edu.casio.com/products/classpad/ ClassPad register URL http://edu.casio.com/dl/...
  • Page 2 Model Number: ClassPad 330 Trade Name: CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. Responsible party: CASIO AMERICA, INC. Address: 570 MT. PLEASANT AVENUE, DOVER, NEW JERSEY 07801 Telephone number: 973-361-5400 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the...
  • Page 3: Unpacking

    USB Cable Quick Start Guide Touch Screen Protector Four AAA-size Batteries LR03 (AM4) ClassPad 330 ClassPad OS Version 3.03 Quick Start Guide CASIO Education website URL http://edu.casio.com ClassPad website URL http://edu.casio.com/products/classpad/ ClassPad register URL (The protector is already installed http://edu.casio.com/dl/ RJA517903-001V01 on the touch screen when you purchase the ClassPad.)
  • Page 4: Attaching And Removing The

    Getting Ready 2. Attaching and Removing the Front Cover u To remove the front cover Before using the ClassPad, remove the front cover and attach it to the back. u To attach the front cover When you are not using the ClassPad, attach the front cover to the front. Important! •...
  • Page 5: Using The Stylus

    Getting Ready 3. Using the Stylus Slide the stylus from the slot provided for it on the ClassPad, and then use it to perform touch panel operations. Important! • Be careful so that you do not misplace or lose the stylus. When you are not using it, always keep the stylus in the slot provided for it on the ClassPad.
  • Page 6 Getting Ready (3) Replace the battery cover, making sure that its tabs enter the holes marked 2 and turn the ClassPad front side up. (4) Remove the front cover from the ClassPad. (5) Align the touch panel. a. Your ClassPad should turn on automatically and display the Touch Panel Alignment screen.
  • Page 7 Getting Ready (7) Specify the display language. a. On the list that appears, tap the language you want to use. • You can select German, English, Spanish, French, or Portuguese. b. W hen the language you want is selected, tap [Set]. • Tapping [Cancel] selects English and advances to the next dialog box. (8) Specify the soft keyboard key arrangement. a. On the list that appears, tap the key arrangement you want to use. b. When the key arrangement you want is selected, tap [Set]. • Tapping [Cancel] selects QWERTY arrangement and advances to the next dialog box. (9) Specify the font set. a. On the list that appears, tap the font set you want to use. • You can select Regular or Bolder. b. When the font set you want is selected, tap [Set]. • Tapping [Cancel] selects Bolder and advances to the next dialog box. 20070301 20060301...
  • Page 8: User Registration

    Getting Ready (10) Configure power properties. a. Configure the Power Save Mode and Auto Power Off settings. • See “Power Saving Mode” and “Auto Power Off” on page 16-6-1 for details about these settings. b. When the configurations are the way you want, tap [Set]. • Tapping [Cancel] selects “1 day” for [Power Save Mode] and “6 min” for [Auto Power Off], and finalizes the setup operation. 5. User Registration Before using your ClassPad or OH-ClassPad, be sure to read the contents of the file named Readme.html, which is on the bundled CD-ROM. There you will find the URL for a Website where you can register as an official user. http://edu.casio.com/dl/ 20070301 20060301...
  • Page 9: Handling Precautions

    Getting Ready Handling Precautions • Your ClassPad is made of precision components. Never try to take it apart. • Avoid dropping your ClassPad and subjecting it to strong impact. • Do not store the ClassPad or leave it in areas exposed to high temperatures or humidity, or large amounts of dust. When exposed to low temperatures, the ClassPad may require more time to display results and may even fail to operate. Correct operation will resume once the ClassPad is brought back to normal temperature. • Replace the batteries once every one year regardless of how much the ClassPad is used during that period. Never leave dead batteries in the battery compartment. They can leak and damage the ClassPad. • Do not use an oxyride battery or any other type of nickel-based primary battery with this product. Incompatibility between such batteries and product specifications can result in shorter battery life and product malfunction. • Keep batteries out of the reach of small children. If swallowed, consult a physician immediately. • Avoid using volatile liquids such as thinners or benzine to clean the ClassPad. Wipe it with a soft, dry cloth, or with a cloth that has been moistened with a solution of water and a neutral detergent and wrung out. • Always be gentle when wiping dust off the display to avoid scratching it. • In no event will the manufacturer and its suppliers be liable to you or any other person for any damages, expenses, lost profits, lost savings or any other damages caused by loss of data and/or formulas arising out of malfunction, repairs, or battery replacement. It is up to you to prepare physical records of data to protect against such data loss. • Never dispose of batteries, the liquid crystal panel, or other components by burning them. • When the “Batteries are extremely low!” message appears on the display, replace the batteries as soon as possible. • Be sure to turn off the ClassPad before replacing the batteries. • If the ClassPad is exposed to a strong electrostatic charge, its memory contents may be damaged or the keys may stop working. In such a case, perform the reset operation to clear the memory and restore normal key operation. • If the ClassPad stops operating correctly for some reason, use the stylus to press the P button on the back of the ClassPad. Note, however, that this clears all the data in ClassPad memory. • Note that strong vibration or impact during program execution can cause execution to stop or can damage the ClassPad’s memory contents. • Using the ClassPad near a television or radio can cause interference with TV or radio reception. • Before assuming malfunction of the ClassPad, be sure to carefully reread this user’s guide to ensure that the problem is not due to insufficient battery power, programming, or operational errors. • Make sure nothing gets between the front cover and the touch screen. Besides creating the risk of scratching the touch screen, an object coming into contact with the screen can cause the power to turn on and run down the batteries.
  • Page 10 • The FA-CP1 software is on the CD-ROM. In no event shall CASIO Computer Co., Ltd. be liable to anyone for special, collateral, incidental, or consequential damages in connection with or arising out of the purchase or use of these materials.
  • Page 11 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •...
  • Page 12: Table Of Contents

    Contents Contents Getting Ready 1. Unpacking .....................1 2. Attaching and Removing the Front Cover ..........2 3. Using the Stylus ...................3 4. Replacing Batteries and Setting Up the ClassPad ........3 5. User Registration ..................6 Handling Precautions ..................7 About This User’s Guide ClassPad Keypad and Icon Panel ..............0-1-1 On-screen Keys, Menus, and Other Controllers ..........0-1-2 Page Contents ....................0-1-3...
  • Page 13 Contents 1-7 Variables and Folders ................1-7-1 Folder Types .......................1-7-1 Variable Types ....................1-7-2 Creating a Folder ....................1-7-4 Creating and Using Variables ................1-7-5 Assigning Values and Other Data to a System Variable ........1-7-10 Locking a Variable or Folder ................1-7-10 Rules Governing Variable Access ..............1-7-11 1-8 Using the Variable Manager ..............
  • Page 14 Contents 2-6 Matrix and Vector Calculations ............2-6-1 Inputting Matrix Data ..................2-6-1 Performing Matrix Calculations ................2-6-4 Using a Matrix to Assign Different Values to Multiple Variables ......2-6-6 2-7 Specifying a Number Base ..............2-7-1 Number Base Precautions ..................2-7-1 Binary, Octal, Decimal, and Hexadecimal Calculation Ranges ......2-7-1 Selecting a Number Base ...................2-7-3 Arithmetic Operations ..................2-7-4 Bitwise Operations ....................2-7-5...
  • Page 15 Contents 2-12 Using Probability ................2-12-1 Starting Up Probability ..................2-12-2 Probability Menus and Buttons .................2-12-2 Using Probability ....................2-12-4 2-13 Running a Program in the Main Application ........2-13-1 Chapter 3 Using the Graph & Table Application 3-1 Graph & Table Application Overview ........... 3-1-1 Starting Up the Graph &...
  • Page 16 Contents 3-7 Using Trace .................... 3-7-1 Using Trace to Read Graph Coordinates ............3-7-1 Linking Trace to a Number Table ...............3-7-3 Generating Number Table Values from a Graph ..........3-7-4 3-8 Analyzing a Function Used to Draw a Graph ........3-8-1 G-Solve Menu Overview ..................3-8-1 Using G-Solve Menu Commands ...............3-8-2 Chapter 4 Using the Conics Application 4-1 Conics Application Overview ...............
  • Page 17 Contents 5-5 Other 3D Graph Application Functions ..........5-5-1 Using Trace to Read Graph Coordinates ............5-5-1 Inserting Text into a 3D Graph Window ..............5-5-1 Calculating a -value for Particular - and -values, or - and -values ....5-5-2 Using Drag and Drop to Down a 3D Graph ............5-5-3 Chapter 6 Using the Sequence Application 6-1 Sequence Application Overview ............
  • Page 18 Contents 7-5 Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data........... 7-5-1 Drawing a Scatter Plot and Line Graph ............7-5-1 Drawing a Regression Graph ................7-5-2 Graphing Previously Calculated Regression Results .........7-5-4 Drawing a Linear Regression Graph ..............7-5-5 Drawing a Med-Med Graph ................7-5-6 Drawing Quadratic, Cubic, and Quartic Regression Graphs ......7-5-7 Drawing a Logarithmic Regression Graph ............7-5-9 b ·...
  • Page 19 Contents 8-3 Editing Figures ..................8-3-1 Selecting and Deselecting Figures ..............8-3-1 Moving and Copying Figures ................8-3-3 Pinning an Annotation on the Geometry Window ..........8-3-4 Specifying the Number Format of a Measurement ..........8-3-5 Using the Measurement Box ................8-3-6 8-4 Controlling Geometry Window Appearance ........8-4-1 Configuring View Window Settings ..............8-4-1 Selecting the Axis Setting ...................8-4-2 Toggling Integer Grid Display On and Off ............8-4-3...
  • Page 20 Contents 10-4 Working with eActivity Files ............... 10-4-1 Opening an Existing eActivity ................10-4-1 Browsing the Contents of an eActivity ..............10-4-2 Editing the Contents of an eActivity ..............10-4-2 Expanding an Application Data Strip ..............10-4-2 Modifying the Data in an Application Data Strip ..........10-4-3 Saving an Edited eActivity ................10-4-3 10-5 Transferring eActivity Files ..............
  • Page 21 Contents 12-3 Debugging a Program ................. 12-3-1 Debugging After an Error Message Appears ............12-3-1 Debugging a Program Following Unexpected Results ........12-3-1 Modifying an Existing Program to Create a New One ........12-3-2 Searching for Data Inside a Program ...............12-3-5 12-4 Managing Files ..................12-4-1 Renaming a File ....................12-4-1 Deleting a Program ...................12-4-1 Changing the File Type ..................12-4-2...
  • Page 22 Contents Cut and Copy ....................13-4-11 Paste ......................13-4-11 Specifying Text or Calculation as the Data Type for a Particular Cell ....13-4-13 Using Drag and Drop to Copy Cell Data within a Spreadsheet ......13-4-14 Using Drag and Drop to Obtain Spreadsheet Graph Data ......13-4-16 Recalculating Spreadsheet Expressions ............13-4-17 Importing and Exporting Variable Values ............13-4-21 Searching for Data in a Spreadsheet .............13-4-26...
  • Page 23 Contents 14-5 Drawing f (x) Type Function Graphs and Parametric Function Graphs....................14-5-1 Drawing an f ( x ) Type Function Graph ..............14-5-1 Drawing a Parametric Function Graph .............14-5-2 14-6 Configuring Differential Equation Graph View Window Parameters ................... 14-6-1 Configuring Differential Equation Graph View Window Settings ......14-6-1 Differential Equation Graph View Window Parameters ........14-6-2 14-7 Differential Equation Graph Window Operations ......
  • Page 24 Contents 15-8 Day Count .................... 15-8-1 Day Count Fields ....................15-8-1 Financial Application Default Setup for Examples ..........15-8-1 15-9 Depreciation ..................15-9-1 Depreciation Fields ...................15-9-1 Calculation Formulas ..................15-9-3 15-10 Bond Calculation................15-10-1 Bond Calculation Fields ..................15-10-1 Financial Application Default Setup for Examples ..........15-10-1 Calculation Formulas ..................15-10-4 15-11 Break-Even Point ................
  • Page 25 Contents 16-8 Specifying the Font Set ..............16-8-1 16-9 Specifying the Alphabetic Keyboard Arrangement ......16-9-1 16-10 Optimizing “Flash ROM” ..............16-10-1 16-11 Specifying the Ending Screen Image ..........16-11-1 16-12 Adjusting Touch Panel Alignment ........... 16-12-1 16-13 Viewing Version Information ............16-13-1 16-14 Registering a User Name on a ClassPad ........16-14-1 16-15 Specifying the Complex Number Imaginary Unit ......16-15-1 16-16 Assigning Shift Mode Key Operations to Hard Keys ..... 16-16-1 Chapter 17 Performing Data Communication 17-1 Data Communication Overview ............17-1-1 Connectable Devices and Transferable Data ...........17-1-1 Using the ClassPad Communication Application ..........17-1-3 17-2 Connecting the ClassPad to Another Device ........
  • Page 26: About This User's Guide

    0-1-1 About This User’s Guide About This User’s Guide This section explains the symbols that are used in this user’s guide to represent keys, stylus operations, display elements, and other items you encounter while operating your ClassPad. ClassPad Keypad and Icon Panel 2 Icon panel s m M r S h 3 Cursor key...
  • Page 27: On-Screen Keys, Menus, And Other Controllers

    0-1-2 About This User’s Guide On-screen Keys, Menus, and Other Controllers 4 Menu bar 5 Toolbar Tabs 6 Soft keyboard 4 Menu bar Menu names and commands are indicated in text by enclosing them inside of brackets. The following examples show typical menu operations. Example 1: Tap the O menu and then tap [Keyboard].
  • Page 28: Page Contents

    0-1-3 About This User’s Guide 5 Toolbar Toolbar button operations are indicated by illustrations that look like the button you need to tap. Example 1: Tap $ to graph the functions. Example 2: Tap ( to open the Stat Editor window. 6 Soft keyboard Key operations on the soft keyboards that appear when you press the k key are indicated by illustrations that look like the keyboard keys.
  • Page 29: Chapter 1 Getting Acquainted

    Chapter Getting Acquainted General Guide Turning Power On and Off Using the Icon Panel Built-in Applications Built-in Application Basic Operations Input Variables and Folders Using the Variable Manager Configuring Application Format Settings 20060301...
  • Page 30: General Guide

    1-1-1 General Guide 1-1 General Guide Front Side s m M r S h ÷ � − (–) Back 20060301...
  • Page 31: General Guide

    1-1-2 General Guide General Guide The numbers next to each of the items below correspond to the numbers in the illustration on page 1-1-1. Front 1 Touch screen The touch screen shows calculation formulas, calculation results, graphs and other information. The stylus that comes with the ClassPad can be used to input data and perform other operations by tapping directly on the touch screen.
  • Page 32 3-pin data communication port Connect the data communication cable here to communicate with another ClassPad unit or a CASIO Data Analyzer. See “Chapter 17 – Performing Data Communication” for details. @ 4-pin mini USB port Connect the data communication cable here to exchange data with a computer. See “Chapter 17 –...
  • Page 33: Using The Stylus

    1-1-4 General Guide Using the Stylus Most value and formula input, command executions, and other operations can be performed using the stylus. k Things you can do with the stylus • This is equivalent to clicking with a mouse. • To perform a tap operation, tap lightly with the stylus on the ClassPad’s touch screen.
  • Page 34: Turning Power On And Off

    1-2-1 Turning Power On and Off 1-2 Turning Power On and Off Turning Power On You can turn on the ClassPad either by pressing the o key or by tapping the touch screen with the stylus. • Turning on the ClassPad (while it is in the sleep state) displays the window that was on the display when you last turned it off.
  • Page 35: Limiting The Duration Of The Sleep State

    1-2-2 Turning Power On and Off Limiting the Duration of the Sleep State You can use the [Power Save Mode] setting (page 16-6-1) to limit the duration of the sleep state that is entered by the Resume function. If you have “1 day” specified for [Power Save Mode], for example, the ClassPad remains in the sleep state for one day after power is turned off.
  • Page 36: Using The Icon Panel

    1-3-1 Using the Icon Panel 1-3 Using the Icon Panel The icon panel of seven permanent icons is located below the touch screen. Tapping an icon executes the function assigned to it. The table below explains what you can do with the icon panel icons. Function When you want to do this: Tap this icon:...
  • Page 37: Built-In Applications

    1-4-1 Built-in Applications 1-4 Built-in Applications Tapping on the icon panel displays the application menu. The table below shows the icon menu names of the built-in applications, and explains what you can do with each application. To perform this type of operation: Select this icon: See Chapter: •...
  • Page 38: Starting A Built-In Application

    1-4-2 Built-in Applications To perform this type of operation: Select this icon: See Chapter: • Exchange data with another ClassPad, a computer, or another device • Clear the memory • Adjust contrast • Configure other system settings Starting a Built-in Application Perform the steps below to start a built-in application.
  • Page 39 1-4-3 Built-in Applications • Displaying applications according to group (Additional Applications, All Applications) See “Using Application Groups” below. • Moving or swapping icons See “Moving an Icon” below, and “Swapping Two Icons” on page 1-4-4. • Deleting an application α See “Deleting an Application”...
  • Page 40: Swapping Two Icons

    1-4-4 Built-in Applications u ClassPad Operation (1) On the icon panel, tap m to display the application menu. (2) Tap at the top left of the application menu. • This opens a menu of setting options. (3) Tap [Move Icon]. (4) Tap the icon you want to move (J in this example).
  • Page 41: Built-In Application Basic Operations

    1-5-1 Built-in Application Basic Operations 1-5 Built-in Application Basic Operations This section explains basic information and operations that are common to all of the built-in applications. Application Window The following shows the basic configuration of a built-in application window. Menu bar Toolbar Application window Soft keyboard (page 1-6-1)
  • Page 42 1-5-2 Built-in Application Basic Operations When using two windows, the currently selected window (the one where you can perform operations) is called the “active window”. The menu bar, toolbar, and status bar contents are all applicable to the active window. The active window is indicated by a thick boundary around u To switch the active window While a dual window is on the display, tap anywhere inside the window that does not have a thick boundary around it to make it the active window.
  • Page 43: Using The Menu Bar

    1-5-3 Built-in Application Basic Operations Using the Menu Bar The menu bar appears along the top of the window of each application. It shows the menus that you can access for the currently active window. Menu bar Tapping the menu bar menu displays its commands, options, and settings from which you can choose the one you want.
  • Page 44: Using The O Menu

    1-5-4 Built-in Application Basic Operations Using the O Menu The O menu appears at the top left of the window of each application, except for the System application. You can access the O menu by tapping s on the icon panel, or by tapping the menu bar’s O menu.
  • Page 45 1-5-5 Built-in Application Basic Operations k Using the O Menu to Access Windows Most ClassPad applications support simultaneous display of two windows. When two windows are on the display, the one with a thick selection boundary around it is the active window.
  • Page 46: Using Check Boxes

    1-5-6 Built-in Application Basic Operations Using Check Boxes A check box shows the current status of a dialog box option that can be turned on or off. An option is turned on (selected) when its check box has a check mark inside it. An option is turned off when a check box is cleared.
  • Page 47: Using Option Buttons

    1-5-7 Built-in Application Basic Operations Using Option Buttons Option buttons are used on dialog boxes that present you with a list of options from which you can select only one. A black option button indicates the currently selected option, while the buttons of the options that are not selected are white.
  • Page 48: Using The Toolbar

    1-5-8 Built-in Application Basic Operations Using the Toolbar The toolbar is located directly underneath the menu bar of an application window. It contains the buttons for the currently active window. Toolbar k Toolbar Buttons Normally, you tap a button to execute the command assigned to it. Some buttons, however, have a down arrow v next to them.
  • Page 49: Interpreting Status Bar Information

    1-5-9 Built-in Application Basic Operations Interpreting Status Bar Information The status bar appears along the bottom of the window of each application. Status bar 1 Information about current application • You can change the configuration of a setting indicated in the status bar by tapping it. Tapping “Cplx”...
  • Page 50 1-5-10 Built-in Application Basic Operations Example: To pause a graphing operation and then resume it u ClassPad Operation (1) Use the Graph & Table application to draw a graph. • For details about graphing, see “Chapter 3 – Using the Graph & Table Application”. (2) While the graph is being drawn, press the K key.
  • Page 51: Input

    1-6-1 Input 1-6 Input You can input data on the ClassPad using its keypad or by using the on-screen soft keyboard. Virtually all data input required by your ClassPad can be performed using the soft keyboard. The keypad keys are used for input of frequently used data like numbers, arithmetic operators, etc.
  • Page 52 1-6-2 Input k Soft Keyboard Styles There are four different soft keyboard styles as described below. • Math (mth) Keyboard Pressing k will display the keyboard that you last displayed while working in that application. If you quit the application and go into another application, then the 9 (default) soft keyboard appears.
  • Page 53: Input Basics

    1-6-3 Input k Selecting a Soft Keyboard Style Tap one of the tabs along the top of the soft keyboard ( 9 , 0 , ( , or ) ) to select the keyboard style you want. Tap here. To display the 2D keyboard Input Basics This section includes a number of examples that illustrate how to perform basic input procedures.
  • Page 54 1-6-4 Input Example 2: To simplify 2 (5 + 4) ÷ (23 × 5) u ClassPad Operation Using the keypad keys 5+4)/ 23*5)E Using the soft keyboard Tap the keys of the math (mth) keyboard or the 2D keyboard to input the calculation expression. c 9 (or ) ) c(f+e)/(cd*f)w •...
  • Page 55 1-6-5 Input u To delete an unneeded key operation Use d and e to move the cursor to the location immediately to the right of the key operation you want to delete, and then press K. Each press of K deletes one command to the left of the cursor. Example: To change the expression 369 ×...
  • Page 56 1-6-6 Input u To insert new input into the middle of an existing calculation expression Use d or e to move the cursor to the location where you want to insert new input, and then input what you want. Example: To change 2.36 to sin(2.36 (1) c 9c.dgx (2) dddddd (3) Ts •...
  • Page 57 1-6-7 Input k Using the Clipboard for Copy and Paste You can copy (or cut) a function, command, or other input to the ClassPad’s clipboard, and then paste the clipboard contents at another location. u To copy characters (1) Drag the stylus across the characters you want to copy to select them. (2) On the soft keyboard, tap G .
  • Page 58: Advanced Soft Keyboard Operations

    1-6-8 Input u Copying and pasting in the message box The “message box” is a 1-line input and display area under the Graph window (see Chapter 3). Message box You can use the two buttons to the right of the message box to copy the message box contents ( G button), or to paste the clipboard contents to the message box ( H button).
  • Page 59 1-6-9 Input u T key set Tapping the T key displays keys for inputting trigonometric functions, and changes the T softkey to I . You can tap this key to toggle between T and the default 9 keyboard. Tapping the = (hyperbolic) key switches to a key set for inputting hyperbolic functions.
  • Page 60 1-6-10 Input u V key set Tapping the V key displays keys for inputting single-character variables, and changes the V softkey to I . You can tap this key to toggle between V and the default 9 keyboard. Tapping the E key switches to a key set for inputting upper-case single- character variables.
  • Page 61 1-6-11 Input u M key set Use the M key set to input Greek characters, Cyrillic characters, and accented characters. Tap the J and K buttons to scroll to additional keys. Tapping E caps locks the keyboard for input of upper-case characters. •...
  • Page 62 1-6-12 Input k Using Single-character Variables As its name suggests, a single-character variable is a variable name that consists of a single character like “ ” or “ ”. Input of single-character variable names is subject to different rules than input of a series of multiple characters (like “abc”). u To input a single-character variable name Any character you input using any one of the following techniques is always treated as a single-character variable.
  • Page 63 1-6-13 Input u To input a series of multiple characters A series of multiple characters (like “list1”) can be used for variable names, program commands, comment text, etc. Always use the alphabet (abc) keyboard when you want to input a series of characters. Example: 0abcw You can also use the alphabet (abc) keyboard to input single-character variable names. To do so, simply input a single character, or follow a single character with a mathematical operator.
  • Page 64 1-6-14 Input u Catalog (cat) keyboard configuration This is an alphabetized list of commands, Tap the down button and then select the functions, and other items available in the category you want ([Func], [Cmd], [Sys], category currently selected with “Form”. [User], or [All]) from the list that appears. Tapping a letter button displays the Tap this key to input the item that is commands, functions, or other items that...
  • Page 65 1-6-15 Input k Using the 2D Keyboard The 2D keyboard provides you with a number of templates that let you input fractions, exponential values, th roots, matrices, differentials, integrals, and other complex expressions as they appear in your textbook. It also includes a V key set that you can use to input single-character variables like the ones you can input with the math (mth) keyboard.
  • Page 66 1-6-16 Input To input this: Use these keys: For more information, see: ∫ “ ” under “Using the Calculation Integration template Submenu” on page 2-8-14. key set key displays a keyboard like the one shown below, which has a I key in Tapping the key. Tapping I returns to the initial 2D keyboard. place of the The following are the mathematical expressions you can input with this 2D keyboard.
  • Page 67 1-6-17 Input u V key set Tapping the V key displays keys for inputting single-character variables, and changes the V softkey to I . You can tap this key to toggle between V and the initial 2D keyboard. Tapping the E key switches to a key set for inputting upper-case single-character variables.
  • Page 68 1-6-18 Input • If you want your ClassPad to evaluate a calculation expression and display a result in the eActivity application, you must input the calculation in a calculation row. See “Inserting a Calculation Row” on page 10-3-3. Σ Example 2: To input (1) Tap ) to display the 2D keyboard and then tap - .
  • Page 69 1-6-19 Input (4) Tap with the stylus to move the cursor to the other input locations to enter the limits of integration. ∫ In the input box above , tap b . ∫ In the input box below , tap a . (5) After everything is the way you want, press E.
  • Page 70: Variables And Folders

    1-7-1 Variables and Folders 1-7 Variables and Folders Your ClassPad lets you register text strings as variables. You can then use a variable to store a value, expression, string, list, matrix, etc. A variable can be recalled by a calculation to access its contents. Variables are stored in folders.
  • Page 71: Variable Types

    1-7-2 Variables and Folders k Current Folder The current folder is the folder where the variables created by applications (excluding eActivity) are stored and from which such variables can be accessed. The initial default current folder is the “main” folder. You can also select a user folder you created as the current folder. For more information about how to do this, see “Specifying the Current Folder”...
  • Page 72 1-7-3 Variables and Folders k Variable Data Types ClassPad variables support a number of data types. The type of data assigned to a variable is indicated by a data type name. Data type names are shown on the Variable Manager variable list, and on the Select Data dialog box that appears when you are specifying a variable in any ClassPad application.
  • Page 73: Creating A Folder

    1-7-4 Variables and Folders Creating a Folder You can have up to 87 user folders in memory at the same time. This section explains how to create a user folder and explains the rules that cover folder names. You can create a folder using either the Variable Manager or the “NewFolder” command. k Creating a folder using the Variable Manager On the Variable Manager window, tap [Edit] and then [Create Folder].
  • Page 74: Creating And Using Variables

    1-7-5 Variables and Folders (4) Tap w to execute the command. • The message “done” appears on the display to let you know that command execution is complete. • You can use the Variable Manager to view the contents of a folder you create. For more information, see “1-8 Using the Variable Manager”.
  • Page 75 1-7-6 Variables and Folders k Single-character Variable Precautions Your ClassPad supports the use of single-character variables, which are variables whose ”. Some ClassPad keys (x, y, Z names consist of a single character like “ ” or “ keypad keys, math (mth) soft keyboard X , Y , Z , [ keys, V key set keys, etc.) are dedicated single-character variable name input keys.
  • Page 76 1-7-7 Variables and Folders • As shown in the above example, assigning something to a variable with a name that does not yet exist in the current folder causes a new variable with that name to be created. If a variable with the specified name already exists in the current folder, the contents of the existing variable are replaced with the newly assigned data, unless the existing variable is protected.
  • Page 77 1-7-8 Variables and Folders k “library” Folder Variables Variables in the “library” folder can be accessed without specifying a path name, regardless of the current folder. Example: To create and access two variables, one located in the “library” folder and one located in another folder u ClassPad Operation (1) With “main”...
  • Page 78 1-7-9 Variables and Folders eq2 w Since variable “eq2” is stored in the “library” folder, you do not need to indicate a path to access it. • Specifying a variable name that exists in both the current folder and the “library” folder causes the variable in the current folder to be accessed.
  • Page 79: Assigning Values And Other Data To A System Variable

    1-7-10 Variables and Folders Assigning Values and Other Data to a System Variable As its name suggests, a system variable is a variable that is created and used by the system (page 1-7-5). Some system variables allow you to assign values and other data to them, while some system variables do not. For more information about which variables allow you to control their contents, see the “System Variable Table”...
  • Page 80: Rules Governing Variable Access

    1-7-11 Variables and Folders Rules Governing Variable Access Normally, you access a variable by specifying its variable name. The rules in this section apply when you need to reference a variable that is not located in the current folder or to access a variable that has the same name as one or more variables located in other folders. k Variable Search Priority Sequence Specifying a variable name to access a variable, searches variables in the following sequence.
  • Page 81: Using The Variable Manager

    1-8-1 Using the Variable Manager 1-8 Using the Variable Manager The Variable Manager is a tool for managing user variables, programs, user functions, and other types of data. Though this section uses only the term “variables”, the explanations provided here also refer to the other types of data that can be managed by the Variable Manager.
  • Page 82: Variable Manager Views

    1-8-2 Using the Variable Manager Variable Manager Views The Variable Manager uses two views, a folder list and a variable list. • The folder list always appears first whenever you start up the Variable Manager. Current folder Folder names Number of variables contained in the folder Folder List •...
  • Page 83: Variable Manager Folder Operations

    1-8-3 Using the Variable Manager Variable Manager Folder Operations This section describes the various folder operations you can perform using the Variable Manager. k Specifying the Current Folder The “current folder” is the folder where the variables created by applications (excluding eActivity) are stored and from which such variables can be accessed. The initial default current folder is the “main”...
  • Page 84 1-8-4 Using the Variable Manager k Selecting and Deselecting Folders The folder operations you perform are performed on the currently selected folders. The folders that are currently selected on the folder list are those whose check boxes are selected (checked). You can use the following operations to select and deselect folders as required. To do this: Do this: Select a single folder...
  • Page 85 1-8-5 Using the Variable Manager • You cannot delete the “library” folder or the “main” folder. • If no check box is currently selected on the folder list, the folder whose name is currently highlighted on the list is deleted when you tap [Edit] and then [Delete]. •...
  • Page 86 1-8-6 Using the Variable Manager k Inputting a Folder Name into an Application Perform the procedure below when you want to input the name of a folder displayed on the Variable Manager window into the application from which you started up the Variable Manager. u ClassPad Operation (1) In the Main application, Graph &...
  • Page 87: Variable Operations

    1-8-7 Using the Variable Manager Variable Operations This section explains the various operations you can perform on the Variable Manager variables. k Opening a Folder Perform the steps below to open a folder and display the variables contained inside it. u ClassPad Operation (1) Start up the Variable Manager and display the folder list. (2) Tap the name of the folder you want to open so it is highlighted, and then tap it again.
  • Page 88 1-8-8 Using the Variable Manager (3) On the dialog box, tap the down arrow button and then select the data type from the list that appears. • To display variables for all data types, select [All]. • For details about data type names and variables, see “Variable Data Types” on page 1-7-3.
  • Page 89 1-8-9 Using the Variable Manager k Deleting a Variable Perform the following steps when you want to delete a variable. u ClassPad Operation (1) Open the folder that contains the variable you want to delete and display the variable list. (2) Select the check box next to the variable you want to delete. •...
  • Page 90 1-8-10 Using the Variable Manager • If no check box is currently selected on the variable list, the variable whose name is currently highlighted on the list is copied or moved. • If a variable with the same name already exists in the destination folder, the variable in the destination folder is replaced with the one that you are copying or moving.
  • Page 91 1-8-11 Using the Variable Manager u To unlock a variable (1) Open the folder that contains the variable you want to unlock and display the variable list. (2) Select the check box next to the variable you want to unlock. (3) Tap [Edit] and then [Unlock]. k Searching for a Variable You can use the following procedure to search the “main”...
  • Page 92 1-8-12 Using the Variable Manager k Viewing the Contents of a Variable You can use the Variable Manager to view the contents of a particular variable. u ClassPad Operation (1) Open the folder that contains the variable whose contents you want to view and display on the variable list. (2) Tap the name of the variable whose contents you want to view so it is highlighted, and then tap it again.
  • Page 93 1-8-13 Using the Variable Manager k Inputting a Variable Name into an Application Perform the procedure below when you want to input the name of a variable from the Variable Manager window into the application from which you started up the Variable Manager. u ClassPad Operation (1) In the Main application, Graph & Table application, or some other application, move the cursor to the location where you want to input the variable name.
  • Page 94: Configuring Application Format Settings

    1-9-1 Configuring Application Format Settings 1-9 Configuring Application Format Settings The O menu includes format settings for configuring the number of calculation result display digits and the angle unit, as well as application-specific commands. The following describes each of the settings and commands that are available on the O menu. Select this O To do this: menu command:...
  • Page 95: Specifying A Variable

    1-9-2 Configuring Application Format Settings Specifying a Variable Certain settings require that you specify variables. If you specify a user-stored variable when configuring the setting of such an item, you must specify the folder where the variable is stored and the variable name. Example: To use [Table Variable] on the [Special] tab of the Graph Format dialog box for configuring a user variable u ClassPad Operation...
  • Page 96: Initializing All Application Format Settings

    1-9-3 Configuring Application Format Settings (5) Use the Select Data dialog box to specify the folder where the variable is saved, and then specify the variable name. • The sample dialog box in step (4) shows selection of the list variable named “ab”, which is located in the folder named “main”.
  • Page 97: Application Format Settings

    1-9-4 Configuring Application Format Settings Application Format Settings This section provides details about all of the settings you can configure using the application format settings. The following two points apply to all of the dialog boxes. • Some settings involve turning options on or off. Selecting a check box next to an option (so it has a check mark) turns it on, while clearing the check box turns it off.
  • Page 98 1-9-5 Configuring Application Format Settings u Number Format To specify this type of numeric value display format: Select this setting: Auto exponential display for values less than 10 and from 10 –2 Normal 1* or greater (when you are in the Decimal mode) Auto exponential display for values less than 10 and from 10 –9...
  • Page 99: Graph Format Dialog Box

    1-9-6 Configuring Application Format Settings k Graph Format Dialog Box Use the Graph Format dialog box to configure settings for the Graph window and for drawing graphs. Basic Tab u Axes To do this: Select this setting: Turn on display of Graph window axes Turn on display of Graph window axes along with maximum Number and minimum value of each axis...
  • Page 100 1-9-7 Configuring Application Format Settings To do this: Do this: Turn on display of Graph window pointer Select the [Coordinates] check box.* coordinates Turn off display of Graph window pointer Clear the [Coordinates] check box. coordinates Turn on display of leading cursor during graphing Select the [Leading Cursor] check box. Turn off display of leading cursor during graphing Clear the [Leading Cursor] check box.* Draw multiple graphs simultaneously Select the [Simul Graph] check box.
  • Page 101 1-9-8 Configuring Application Format Settings u Stat Window Auto To do this: Do this: Configure Statistics application View Window Select the [Stat Window Auto] check box.* settings automatically Configure Statistics application View Window Clear the [Stat Window Auto] check box. settings manually k 3D Format Dialog Box Use the 3D Format dialog box to configure settings for...
  • Page 102 1-9-9 Configuring Application Format Settings u G-Controller To do this: Do this: Turn on display of graph controller arrows Select the [G-Controller] check box. during graphing Turn off display of graph controller arrows Clear the [G-Controller] check box.* during graphing •...
  • Page 103 1-9-10 Configuring Application Format Settings u Measure Angle To specify the angle unit for the measurement box: Select this setting: Radian Radian Degree Degree* Grad Grad u Function Angle To specify the angle unit for graphing: Select this setting: Radian Radian* Degree Degree...
  • Page 104 1-9-11 Configuring Application Format Settings k Advanced Format Dialog Box Use the Advanced Format dialog box to configure settings for Fourier transform and FFT settings. u Fourier Transform To do this: Select this setting: Specify following formula for Fourier transform: Pure Math* Specify following formula for Fourier transform: Modern Physics...
  • Page 105 1-9-12 Configuring Application Format Settings k Financial Format Dialog Box Use the Financial Format dialog box to configure settings for the Financial application. Basic Tab u Days in Year To do this: Select this setting: Specify a 360-day year 360 days* Specify a 365-day year 365 days u Payment Date...
  • Page 106 1-9-13 Configuring Application Format Settings Special Tab u Odd Period To do this: Select this setting: Specify compound interest for odd (partial) months Compound (CI) Specify simple interest for odd (partial) months Simple (SI) Specify no separation of full and odd (partial) months Off* u Compounding Frequency To do this:...
  • Page 107: Presentation Dialog Box

    1-9-14 Configuring Application Format Settings k Presentation Dialog Box Use the Presentation dialog box to configure settings for the Presentation application. For full details about the Presentation application, see Chapter 11. To do this: Do this: Send hard copy data to an external device Select “Outer Device”...
  • Page 108 1-9-15 Configuring Application Format Settings k Communication Dialog Box Use the Communication dialog box to configure communication settings. For full details about the Communication application, see Chapter 17. u Screen Copy To u Cable Type To do this with hard To use this type of Select this Select this...
  • Page 109: Chapter 2 Using The Main Application

    Chapter Using the Main Application The Main application is a general-purpose numerical and mathematical calculation application that you can use to study mathematics and solve mathematical problems. You can use the Main application to perform general operations from basic arithmetic calculations, to calculations that involve lists, matrices, etc.
  • Page 110: Main Application Overview

    2-1-1 Main Application Overview 2-1 Main Application Overview This section provides information about the following. • Main application windows • Modes that determine how calculations and their results are displayed • Menus and their commands Starting Up the Main Application Use the following procedure to start up the Main application.
  • Page 111 2-1-2 Main Application Overview • Basic Main application operations consist of inputting a calculation expression into the work area and pressing E. This performs the calculation and then displays its result on the right side of the work area. Input expression Calculation result...
  • Page 112: Main Application Menus And Buttons

    2-1-3 Main Application Overview Main Application Menus and Buttons This section explains the operations you can perform using the menus and buttons of the Main application. • For information about the O menu, see “Using the O Menu” on page 1-5-4. Menu Commands Select this To do this:...
  • Page 113: Using Main Application Modes

    2-1-4 Main Application Overview Using Main Application Modes The Main application has a number of different modes that control how calculation results are displayed, as well as other factors. The current mode is indicated in the status bar. k Status Bar Mode Indicators Settings that are marked with an asterisk (*) in the following tables are initial defaults.
  • Page 114: Accessing Classpad Application Windows From The Main Application

    2-1-5 Main Application Overview Accessing ClassPad Application Windows from the Main Application Tapping the down arrow button on the toolbar displays a palette of 15 icons that you can use to access certain windows of other ClassPad applications. Tapping the ( button, for example, splits the display into two windows, with the Stat Editor window of the Statistics application in the lower window.
  • Page 115: Accessing The Main Application Window From Another Classpad Application

    2-1-6 Main Application Overview • You can perform drag and drop operations with expressions between the Main application work area and the currently displayed window. For example, you could drag an expression from the Main application work area to the Graph window, and graph the expression. For details, see “2-10 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications”.
  • Page 116: Basic Calculations

    2-2-1 Basic Calculations 2-2 Basic Calculations This section explains how to perform basic mathematical operations in the Main application. Arithmetic Calculations and Parentheses Calculations • You can perform arithmetic calculations by inputting expressions as they are written. All of the example calculations shown below are performed using the 9 soft keyboard, unless noted otherwise.
  • Page 117: Using The E Key

    2-2-2 Basic Calculations Using the e Key Use the e key to input exponential values. You can also input exponential values using the E key on the 9 and ) keyboards. Examples: 2.54 × 10 = 2540 c.fe e dw –4 1600 × 10 = 0.16 bgaaE-ew Omitting the Multiplication Sign You can omit the multiplication sign in any of the following cases.
  • Page 118 2-2-3 Basic Calculations • The “ans” variable is a system variable. For details about system variables, see “1-7 Variables and Folders”. • Since “ans” is a variable name, you can specify the “ans” variable by inputting [a][n][s] on the 0 (alphabet) keyboard, or by tapping the D key on the 9 or the ) keyboard. •...
  • Page 119: Assigning A Value To A Variable

    2-2-4 Basic Calculations Assigning a Value to a Variable Besides using the variable assignment key ( W , page 1-7-6), you can also use the syntax shown below in the Main application and eActivity application to assign a value to a variable. Syntax: Variable: = value Example: Assign 123 to variable x u ClassPad Operation (1) Perform the key operation below in the Main application work area.
  • Page 120: Calculation Priority Sequence

    2-2-5 Basic Calculations Calculation Priority Sequence Your ClassPad automatically performs calculations in the following sequence. 1 Commands with parentheses (sin(, diff(, etc.) ! ), degree specifications ( 2 Factorials ( ), percents (%) 3 Powers 4 π, memory, and variable multiplication operations that omit the multiplication sign (2π, 5A, etc.) Command with parentheses multiplication operations that omit the multiplication sign (2 3, etc.)
  • Page 121: Calculation Modes

    2-2-6 Basic Calculations Calculation Modes The Main application has a number of different modes, as described under “Using Main Application Modes” on page 2-1-4. The display format of calculation results depends on the currently selected Main application mode. This section tells you which mode you need to use for each type of calculation, and explains the differences between the calculation results produced by each mode.
  • Page 122 2-2-7 Basic Calculations u Using the u Button to Toggle between the Standard Mode and Decimal Mode You can tap u to toggle a displayed value between Standard mode and Decimal mode format. Note that tapping u toggles the format of a displayed value. It does not change the current Standard mode/Decimal mode setting.
  • Page 123 2-2-8 Basic Calculations k Complex Mode and Real Mode The Complex mode is for complex number calculations, while the Real mode is limited to calculations within the range of real numbers. Performing a calculation in the Real mode that produces a result that is outside the range of real numbers causes an error (Non-Real in Calc error).
  • Page 124: Using The Calculation History

    2-3-1 Using the Calculation History 2-3 Using the Calculation History The Main application work area calculation history can contain up to 30 expression/result pairs. You can look up a previous calculation, edit, and then re-calculate it, if you want. Viewing Calculation History Contents Use the scroll bar or scroll buttons to scroll the work area window up and down. This brings current calculation history contents into view.
  • Page 125: Re-Calculating An Expression

    2-3-2 Using the Calculation History Re-calculating an Expression You can edit a calculation expression in the calculation history and then re-calculate the resulting expression. Tapping w re-calculates the expression where the cursor is currently located, and also re-calculates all of the expressions below the current cursor location. Example 1: To change the expression “ans ×...
  • Page 126 2-3-3 Using the Calculation History Example 2: To change from the Standard mode to the Decimal mode (page 2-2-6), and then re-calculate u ClassPad Operation (1) Move the cursor to the location from which you want to re-calculate. • In this example, we will tap the end of line 2 to locate the cursor there. (2) Tap “Standard”...
  • Page 127: Deleting Part Of The Calculation History Contents

    2-3-4 Using the Calculation History Deleting Part of the Calculation History Contents You can use the following procedure to delete an individual two-line expression/result unit from the calculation history. u ClassPad Operation (1) Move the cursor to the expression line or result line of the two-line unit you want to delete.
  • Page 128: Function Calculations

    2-4-1 Function Calculations 2-4 Function Calculations This section explains how to perform function calculations in the Main application work area. • Most of the operators and functions described in this section are input from the 9 (math) and ( (catalog) keyboard. The actual keyboard you should use to perform the sample operations presented here is the one indicated by a ...
  • Page 129 2-4-2 Function Calculations k Trigonometric Functions (sin, cos, tan) and Inverse Trigonometric Functions (sin , cos , tan –1 –1 –1 The first four examples below use “Degree” (indicated by “Deg” in the status bar) as the angle unit setting. The final example uses “Radian” (indicated by “Rad”). For details about these settings, see “1-9 Configuring Application Format Settings”.
  • Page 130 2-4-3 Function Calculations k Logarithmic Functions (log, ln) and Exponential Functions ( , ^, Use this keyboard: Problem Operation log1.23 (log 1.23) = Func l 1.23 w or   )V 10 e 1.23 w 0.08990511144 I 90 w or ln90 (log 90) = 4.49980967 Func   )V0ne e 90 w 9 = 2 Func l 3 , 9 w or...
  • Page 131 2-4-4 Function Calculations k Hyperbolic Functions (sinh, cosh, tanh) and Inverse Hyperbolic Functions (sinh , cosh , tanh –1 –1 –1 Use this keyboard: Problem Operation =1 3.6 w sinh3.6 = 18.28545536 TRIG Func =2 1.5 )-1 1.5 cosh1.5 – sinh1.5 TRIG Func = 0.2231301601 MATH Func e - 1.5 w = 0.2231301601* –1.5 ...
  • Page 132 2-4-5 Function Calculations k Other Functions (%, !, abs, signum, int, frac, intg, fRound, –1 sRound) Use this keyboard: Problem Operation 1500 * 12 &w What is 12% of 1500? 180 SMBL Cmd What percent of 880 is 660? SMBL Cmd 660 / 880 &w 2500 *( 1 + 15 & What value is 15% greater SMBL Cmd than 2500?
  • Page 133 2-4-6 Function Calculations Use this keyboard: Problem Operation [signum] - 3.4567 w What is the sign of Func –3.4567? –1 (signum returns –1 for a negative value, 1 for a positive value, “Undefined” for 0, and for an A imaginary number.) What is the integer part of CALC Func - 3.4567 w...
  • Page 134 2-4-7 Function Calculations u “rand” Function • The “rand” function generates random numbers. If you do not specify an argument, “rand” generates 10-digit decimal values 0 or greater and less than 1. Specifying two integer values for the argument generates random numbers between them. Use this keyboard: Problem Operation...
  • Page 135 2-4-8 Function Calculations u “RandSeed” Command • You can specify an integer from 0 to 9 for the argument of this command. 0 specifies non- sequential random number generation. An integer from 1 to 9 uses the specified value as a seed for specification of sequential random numbers. The initial default argument for this command is 0.
  • Page 136 2-4-9 Function Calculations k Permutation (nPr) and Combination (nCr) u Total Number of Permutations nPr = ––––– ( n – r )! u Total Number of Combinations nCr = ––––––– r ! ( n – r )! Use this keyboard: Problem Operation } 10 , 4 w How many different CALC Func permutations are possible when you have 10 different objects and arrange them...
  • Page 137 2-4-10 Function Calculations The “piecewise” function returns one value when an expression is true, and another value when the expression is false. The syntax of the “piecewise” function is shown below. piecewise(<condition expression>, <return value when true>, <return value when false or indeterminate>[ ) ] piecewise(<condition expression>, <return value when true>, <return value when false>, <return value when indeterminate>[ ) ]...
  • Page 138 2-4-11 Function Calculations k Equal Symbols and Unequal Symbols (=, ≠, <, >, , > ) You can use these symbols to perform a number of different basic calculations. Use this keyboard: Problem Operation To add 3 to both sides of MATH Cmd (X= 3 )+ 3 w  = 3. + 3 = 6 Subtract 2 from both sides OPTN MATH Cmd...
  • Page 139 2-4-12 Function Calculations ∞ k Solutions Supported by ClassPad (TRUE, FALSE, Undefined, No Solution, const, constn) Solution Description Example TRUE Output when a solution is true. judge (1 = 1) w FALSE Output when a solution is false. judge (1 < 0) w Undefined Output when a solution is undefined. 1/0 w No Solution Output when there is no solution.
  • Page 140 2-4-13 Function Calculations k Dirac Delta Function “delta” is the Dirac Delta function. The delta function evaluates numerically as shown below. ≠ 0 d (x) = Non-numeric expressions passed to the delta function are left unevaluated. The integral of a linear delta function is a Heaviside function. Syntax: delta( : variable or number Examples:...
  • Page 141 2-4-14 Function Calculations k Heaviside Unit Step Function “heaviside” is the command for the Heaviside function, which evaluates only to numeric expressions as shown below. x < H(x) = x > Any non-numeric expression passed to the Heaviside function will not be evaluated, and any numeric expression containing complex numbers will return undefined.
  • Page 142 2-4-15 Function Calculations k Gamma Function The Gamma function is called “gamma” on the ClassPad. ∫ +∞ –1 – Γ( For an integer n the gamma is evaluated as shown below. n > (n – 1) !, G (n) = undefined n <...
  • Page 143: List Calculations

    2-5-1 List Calculations 2-5 List Calculations This section explains how to input data using the Main application or Stat Editor, and how to perform basic list calculations. Inputting List Data You can input list data from the work area or on the Stat Editor window. k Inputting List Data from the Work Area Example: To input the list {1, 2, 3} and assign it to LIST variable “lista”.
  • Page 144 2-5-2 List Calculations k LIST Variable Element Operations You can recall the value of any element of a LIST variable. When the values {1, 2, 3} are assigned to “lista”, for example, you can recall the second value in the “lista”, when you need You can also assign a value to any element in a list.
  • Page 145: Using A List In A Calculation

    2-5-3 List Calculations Using a List in a Calculation You can perform arithmetic operations between two lists, between a list and a numeric value, or between a list and an expression, equation, or inequality. List List Numeric Value Numeric Value − List × Expression Expression ÷...
  • Page 146: Using A List To Assign Different Values To Multiple Variables

    2-5-4 List Calculations Using a List to Assign Different Values to Multiple Variables Use the procedure in this section when you want to use a list to assign various different values to multiple variables. Syntax: List with Numbers S List with Variables Example: Assign the values 10, 20, and 30, to variables , and respectively...
  • Page 147: Matrix And Vector Calculations

    2-6-1 Matrix and Vector Calculations 2-6 Matrix and Vector Calculations This section explains how to create matrices in the Main application, and how to perform basic matrix calculations. • Since a vector can be viewed as 1-row by -column matrix or -row by 1-column matrix, this section does not include explanations specifically about vectors.
  • Page 148 2-6-2 Matrix and Vector Calculations k Matrix Variable Element Operations You can recall the value of any element of a MATRIX variable. When the data is assigned to matrix “mat1”, for example, you can recall the element located at row 2, column 1. You can also assign a value to any element in a matrix.
  • Page 149 2-6-3 Matrix and Vector Calculations k Inputting Matrix Values with the ) Keyboard The 6 , 7 , and 8 keys of the ) keyboard make matrix value input quick and easy. To do this: Tap this 2D key: Create a new 1-row × 2-column matrix Create a new 2-row × 1-column matrix Create a new 2-row ×...
  • Page 150: Performing Matrix Calculations

    2-6-4 Matrix and Vector Calculations • In step (1) of the above procedure, we added rows and columns as they became necessary. Another way to accomplish the same result would be to add rows and columns to create a blank matrix of the required dimensions, and then start data input.
  • Page 151 2-6-5 Matrix and Vector Calculations (3) Tap 8 , and then input the values for the second matrix. (4) Tap w . Example 3: To multiply the matrix by 5 u ClassPad Operation (1) Perform the key operation below in the Main application work area. 9[[b,c][d,e]]*f (2) Tap w .
  • Page 152: Using A Matrix To Assign Different Values To Multiple Variables

    2-6-6 Matrix and Vector Calculations k Raising a Matrix to a Specific Power Example: To raise to the power of 3 Use the procedures described under “Matrix Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, and Division” on page 2-6-4 to input the calculation. The following are the screens that would be produced by each input method. Input using the 9 keyboard Input using the ) keyboard •...
  • Page 153: Specifying A Number Base

    2-7-1 Specifying a Number Base 2-7 Specifying a Number Base While using the Main application, you can specify a default number base (binary, octal, decimal, hexadecimal) or you can specify a number base for a particular integer value. You can also convert between number bases and perform bitwise operations using logical operators (not, and, or, xor).
  • Page 154 2-7-2 Specifying a Number Base • The following are the calculation ranges for each of the number bases. Binary Values: Positive: 0 01111111111111111111111111111111 Negative: 10000000000000000000000000000000 11111111111111111111111111111111 Octal Values: Positive: 0 17777777777 Negative: 20000000000 37777777777 Decimal Values: Positive: 0 2147483647 Negative: −2147483648 −1 Hexadecimal Values: Positive: 0...
  • Page 155: Selecting A Number Base

    2-7-3 Specifying a Number Base Selecting a Number Base Specifying a default number base in the Main application will apply to the current line (expression/result pair), and to all subsequent lines until you change the default number base setting. Use the number toolbar’s base buttons to specify the number base. u To select the number base for the line where the cursor is located (1) Tap the down arrow button next to the button.
  • Page 156: Arithmetic Operations

    2-7-4 Specifying a Number Base • Whenever you input a value into a line for which a number base is specified, the input value is converted automatically to the specified number base. Performing the calculation 19+1 in a line for which Hex (Hexadecimal) is specified as the number base, both the 19 and 1 are interpreted as hexadecimal values, which produces the calculation result 1Ah.
  • Page 157: Bitwise Operations

    2-7-5 Specifying a Number Base Bitwise Operations The logical operators listed below can be used in calculations. Operator Description Returns the result of a bitwise product. Returns the result of a bitwise sum. Returns the result of a bitwise exclusive logical sum. Returns the result of a complement (bitwise inversion).
  • Page 158: Using The Action Menu

    2-8-1 Using the Action Menu 2-8 Using the Action Menu The [Action] menu helps to make transformation and expansion functions, calculus functions, statistical functions, and other frequently used mathematical menu operations easier to use. Simply select the function you want, and then enter expressions or variables in accordance with the syntax of the function.
  • Page 159: Example Screenshots

    2-8-2 Using the Action Menu Example Screenshots The screenshots below show examples of how input and output expressions appear on the ClassPad display. In some cases, the input expression and output expression (result) may not fit in the display area. If this happens, tap the left or right arrows that appear on the display to scroll the expression screen and view the part that does not fit.
  • Page 160: Displaying The Action Menu

    2-8-3 Using the Action Menu Displaying the Action Menu Tap [Action] on the menu bar to display the menu of 12 submenus shown below. The following explains the functions that are available on each of these submenus. Using the Transformation Submenu The [Transformation] submenu contains commands for expression transformation, like “expand”...
  • Page 161 2-8-4 Using the Action Menu u simplify Function: Simplifies an expression. Syntax: simplify (Exp/Eq/Ineq/List/Mat [ ) ] • Ineq (inequality) includes the “≠” (not equal to) relational operator. Example: To simplify (15 3 + 26)^(1/3) Menu Item: [Action][Transformation][simplify] Example: To simplify cos(2 ) + (sin( (in the Radian mode) Menu Item: [Action][Transformation][simplify]...
  • Page 162 2-8-5 Using the Action Menu u rFactor Function: Factors an expression up to its roots, if any. Syntax: rFactor (Exp/Eq/Ineq/List/Mat [ ) ] • Ineq (inequality) includes the “≠” (not equal to) relational operator. Example: To factor  3 Menu Item: [Action][Transformation][rFactor] u factorOut Function: Factors out an expression with respect to a specified factor.
  • Page 163 2-8-6 Using the Action Menu u tExpand Function: Employs the sum and difference formulas to expand a trigonometric function. Syntax: tExpand(Exp/Eq/Ineq/List/Mat [ ) ] • Ineq (inequality) includes the “≠” (not equal to) relational operator. Example: To expand sin (a + b) Menu Item: [Action][Transformation][tExpand] u tCollect Function: Employs the product to sum formulas to transform the product of a trigonometric...
  • Page 164 2-8-7 Using the Action Menu u propFrac Function: Transforms a decimal value into its equivalent proper fraction value. Syntax: propFrac (Exp/Eq/Ineq/List/Mat [ ) ] • Ineq (inequality) includes the “≠” (not equal to) relational operator. Example: To transform 1.2 into its equivalent proper fraction value Menu Item: [Action][Transformation][propFrac] Example: To divide by (...
  • Page 165: Using The Advanced Submenu

    2-8-8 Using the Action Menu Using the Advanced Submenu u solve For information about solve, see page 2-8-43. u dSolve For information about dSolve, see page 2-8-44. u taylor Function: Finds a Taylor polynomial for an expression with respect to a specifi c variable. Syntax: taylor (Exp/List, variable, order [,center point] [ ) ] Example: To fi...
  • Page 166 2-8-9 Using the Action Menu ClassPad supports transform of the following functions. sin( ), cos( ), sinh( ), cosh( , heaviside( ), delta( ), delta( ClassPad does not support transform of the following functions. tan( ), sin ), cos ), tan ), tanh( ), sinh ), cosh...
  • Page 167 2-8-10 Using the Action Menu The Fourier Transform pairs are defined using two arbitrary constants a , b .   ∞ ∫ ibωt ω π 1–a – ∞   ∞ dω ∫ ω ibωt – π –∞ The values of a and b depend on the scientific discipline, which can be specified by the value of n (optional fourth parameter of Fourier and invFourier) as shown below.
  • Page 168 2-8-11 Using the Action Menu u FFT, IFFT Function: “ ” is the command for the fast Fourier Transform, and “ IFFT ” is the command for the inverse fast Fourier Transform. data values are needed to perform FFT and IFFT. On the ClassPad, FFT and IFFT are calculated numerically.
  • Page 169: Using The Calculation Submenu

    2-8-12 Using the Action Menu In general, the Fourier transform pair may be defi ned using two arbitrary constants a and b as shown below. ⏐ ⏐ ∞ ω ∫ ibωt π 1–a –∞ ⏐ ⏐ ∞ ∫ ω – dω...
  • Page 170 2-8-13 Using the Action Menu u diff Function: Differentiates an expression with respect to a specific variable. Syntax: diff(Exp/List[,variable] [ ) ] diff(Exp/List,variable,order[,a] [ ) ] • “a” is the point for which you want to determine the derivative. • “order” = 1 when you use the following syntax: diff(Exp/List [,variable][ ) ]. The default variable is “...
  • Page 171 2-8-14 Using the Action Menu ∫ Function: Integrates an expression with respect to a specific variable. Syntax: ∫ (Exp/List[,variable] [ ) ] ∫ (Exp/List, variable, lower limit, upper limit [, ] [ ) ] • “ ” is the default when you omit [,variable]. •...
  • Page 172 2-8-15 Using the Action Menu u lim Function: Determines the limit of an expression. Syntax: lim (Exp/List, variable, point [,direction] [ ) ] ∞ Example: To determine the limit of – approaches Menu Item: [Action][Calculation][lim] 1/ x Example: To determine the limit of approaches 0 from the right Menu Item: [Action][Calculation][lim] 1/ x...
  • Page 173 2-8-16 Using the Action Menu u rangeAppoint Function: Finds an expression or value that satisfies a condition in a specified range. Syntax: rangeAppoint (Exp/Eq/List, start value, end value [ ) ] • When using an equation (Eq) for the first argument, input the equation using the syntax Var = Exp.
  • Page 174 2-8-17 Using the Action Menu u fMin Function: Returns the minimum point in a specific range of a function. Syntax: fMin(Exp[,variable] [ ) ] fMin(Exp,variable,start value,end value[, ] [ ) ] • “ ” is the default when you omit “[,variable]”. •...
  • Page 175 2-8-18 Using the Action Menu u fMax Function: Returns the maximum point in a specific range of a function. Syntax: fMax(Exp[,variable] [ ) ] fMax(Exp,variable,start value,end value[, ] [ ) ] • “ ” is the default when you omit “[,variable]”. •...
  • Page 176: Using The Complex Submenu

    2-8-19 Using the Action Menu u lcm Function: Returns the least common multiple of two expressions. Syntax: lcm (Exp/List-1, Exp/List-2 [ ) ] Example: To obtain the least common multiple of – 1 and – 3 Menu Item: [Action][Calculation][lcm] u denominator Function: Extracts the denominator of a fraction.
  • Page 177 2-8-20 Using the Action Menu u conjg Function: Returns the conjugate complex number. Syntax: conjg (Exp/Eq/List/Mat [ ) ] • An inequality with the “≠” (not equal to) relation symbol is also included (only in the Real mode). Example: To obtain the conjugate of complex number 1 + Menu Item: [Action][Complex][conjg] u re Function: Returns the real part of a complex number.
  • Page 178: Using The List-Create Submenu

    2-8-21 Using the Action Menu u compToPol Function: Transforms a complex number into its polar form. Syntax: compToPol (Exp/Eq/List/Mat [ ) ] • Ineq (inequality) includes the “ ” (not equal to) relational operator. Example: To transform 1 + into its polar form (in the Radian mode) Menu Item: [Action][Complex][compToPol] u compToTrig Function: Transforms a complex number into its trigonometric/hyperbolic form.
  • Page 179 2-8-22 Using the Action Menu u seq Function: Generates a list in accordance with a numeric sequence expression. Syntax: seq (Exp, variable, start value, end value [,step size] [ ) ] Example: To generate a list in accordance with the expression when the start value is 1, the end value is 5, and the step size is 2 Menu Item: [Action][List-Create][seq]...
  • Page 180 2-8-23 Using the Action Menu u subList Function: Extracts a specific section of a list into a new list. Syntax: subList (List [,start number] [,end number] [ ) ] Example: To extract the second through the fourth elements of the list {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} Menu Item: [Action][List-Create][subList] •...
  • Page 181: Using The List-Calculation Submenu

    2-8-24 Using the Action Menu u sortD Function: Sorts the elements of the list into descending order. Syntax: sortD (List [ ) ] Example: To sort the elements of the list {1, 5, 3} into descending order Menu Item: [Action][List-Create][sortD] u listToMat Function: Transforms lists into a matrix.
  • Page 182 2-8-25 Using the Action Menu u min Function: Returns the minimum value of an expression or the elements in a list. Syntax: min (Exp/List-1[, Exp/List-2] [ ) ] Example: To determine the minimum values of the elements in list {1, 2, 3} Menu Item: [Action][List-Calculation][min] Example: To compare each element of list {1, 2, 3} with the value 2, and produce a list whose elements contain the lesser value of each comparison...
  • Page 183 2-8-26 Using the Action Menu u mean Function: Returns the mean of the elements in a list. Syntax: mean (List-1[, List-2] [ ) ] • “List-2” specifies the frequency of each element in “List-1”. Example: To determine the mean of the elements in list {1, 2, 3} Menu Item: [Action][List-Calculation][mean] Example: To determine the mean of the elements in the list {1, 2, 3}, whose respective frequencies are {3, 2, 1}...
  • Page 184 2-8-27 Using the Action Menu Function: Returns the first quartile of the elements in a list. Syntax: Q (List-1[, List-2] [ ) ] • “List-2” specifies the frequency of each element in “List-1”. Example: To determine the first quartile of the elements in the list {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} Menu Item: [Action][List-Calculation][Q Example: To determine the first quartile of the elements in the list {1, 2, 3, 4}, whose respective frequencies are {4, 3, 2, 1}...
  • Page 185 2-8-28 Using the Action Menu u variance Function: Returns the sample variance of the elements in a list. Syntax: variance (List [ ) ] Example: To determine the sample variance of the elements in the list {1, 2, 4} Menu Item: [Action][List-Calculation][variance] u dim Function: Returns the dimension of a list.
  • Page 186 2-8-29 Using the Action Menu u cuml Function: Returns the cumulative sums of the elements in a list. Syntax: cuml (List [ ) ] Example: To determine the cumulative sums of the elements in the list {1, 2, 3} Menu Item: [Action][List-Calculation][cuml] u A list Function: Returns a list whose elements are the differences between two adjacent elements in another list.
  • Page 187 2-8-30 Using the Action Menu u sequence Function: Returns the lowest-degree polynomial that represents the sequence expressed by the input list. When there are two lists, this command returns a polynomial that maps each element in the first list to its corresponding element in the second list.
  • Page 188: Using The Matrix-Create Submenu

    2-8-31 Using the Action Menu Using the Matrix-Create Submenu The [Matrix-Create] submenu contains commands related to creation of matrices. u trn Function: Returns a transposed matrix. Syntax: trn (Mat [ ) ] Example: To transpose the matrix [[1, 2] [3, 4]] Menu Item: [Action][Matrix-Create][trn] u augment Function: Returns a matrix that combines two other matrices.
  • Page 189 2-8-32 Using the Action Menu u fill Function: Creates a matrix with a specific number of rows and columns, or replaces the elements of a matrix with a specific expression. Syntax: fill (Exp, number of rows, number of columns [ ) ] fill (Exp, Mat [ ) ] Example: To create a 2 ×...
  • Page 190: Using The Matrix-Calculation Submenu

    2-8-33 Using the Action Menu u matToList Function: Transforms a specifi c column of a matrix into a list. Syntax: matToList (Mat, column number [ ) ] Example: To transform column 2 of the matrix [[1, 2] [3, 4]] into a list Menu Item: [Action][Matrix-Create][matToList] Using the Matrix-Calculation Submenu The [Matrix-Calculation] submenu contains commands that are related to matrix calculations.
  • Page 191 2-8-34 Using the Action Menu u norm Function: Returns the Frobenius norm of the matrix. Syntax: norm (Mat [ ) ] Example: To determine the norm of the matrix [[1, 2] [4, 5]] Menu Item: [Action][Matrix-Calculation][norm] u rank Function: Finds the rank of matrix. The rank function computes the rank of a matrix by performing Gaussian elimination on the rows of the given matrix.
  • Page 192 2-8-35 Using the Action Menu u eigVc Function: Returns a matrix in which each column represents an eigenvector of a square matrix. • Since an eigenvector usually cannot be determined uniquely, it is standardized as follows to its norm, which is 1: + ...
  • Page 193 2-8-36 Using the Action Menu u QR Function: Returns the QR decomposition of a square matrix. Syntax: QR (Mat, qVariableMem, rVariableMem [ ) ] Example: To obtain the QR decomposition of the matrix [[1, 2] [3, 4]] • The unitary matrix is assigned to variable Q, while the upper triangular matrix is assigned to variable R.
  • Page 194 2-8-37 Using the Action Menu u mRowAdd Function: Multiplies the elements of a specific row in a matrix by a specific expression, and then adds the result to another row. Syntax: mRowAdd (Exp, Mat, row number-1, row number-2 [ ) ] Example: To multiply row 1 of the matrix [[1, 2] [3, 4]] by , and then add the result to row 2 Menu Item: [Action][Matrix-Calculation][mRowAdd]...
  • Page 195: Using The Vector Submenu

    2-8-38 Using the Action Menu u colNorm Function: Calculates the sums of the absolute values of the elements of each column of a matrix, and returns the maximum value of the sums. Syntax: colNorm (Mat [ ) ] Example: To calculate the sums of the absolute values of the elements in each column of the matrix [[1, –2, 3][4, –5, –6][–7, 8, 9]], and obtain the maximum value of the sums Menu Item: [Action][Matrix-Calculation]...
  • Page 196 2-8-39 Using the Action Menu u augment Function: Returns an augmented vector [Mat-1 Mat-2]. Syntax: augment (Mat-1, Mat-2 [ ) ] Example: To augment vectors [1, 2] and [3, 4] Menu Item: [Action][Vector][augment] u fill Function: Creates a vector that contains a specific number of elements, or replaces the elements of a vector with a specific expression.
  • Page 197 2-8-40 Using the Action Menu u angle Function: Returns the angle formed by two vectors. Syntax: angle (Mat-1, Mat-2 [ ) ] • This command can be used with a 1 × N or N × 1 matrix only. Example: To determine the angle formed by vectors [1, 2] and [3, 4] (in the Radian mode) Menu Item: [Action][Vector][angle] u norm Function: Returns the norm of a vector.
  • Page 198 2-8-41 Using the Action Menu u toRect x y z Function: Returns an equivalent rectangular form [ ] or [ Syntax: toRect (Mat [,natural number] [ ) ] • This command can be used with a 1 × N or N × 1 matrix only (N = 2, 3). ”...
  • Page 199: Using The Equation/Inequality Submenu

    2-8-42 Using the Action Menu u toCyl ∠ θ Function: Returns an equivalent cylindrical form [ Syntax: toCyl (Mat [,natural number] [ ) ] • This command can be used with a 1 × 3 or 3 × 1 matrix only. ”...
  • Page 200 2-8-43 Using the Action Menu u solve Function: Returns the solution of an equation or inequality. Syntax: solve (Exp/Eq/Ineq [,variable] [ ) ] • For this syntax, “Ineq” also includes the operator. • “ ” is the default when you omit “[,variable]”. solve (Exp/Eq,variable[, value, lower limit, upper limit] [ ) ] •...
  • Page 201 2-8-44 Using the Action Menu u dSolve Function: Solves first, second or third order ordinary differential equations, or a system of first order differential equations. Syntax: dSolve (Eq, independent variable, dependent variable [, initial condition-1, initial condition-2][, initial condition-3, initial condition-4][, initial condition-5, initial condition-6] [ ) ] dSolve ({Eq-1, Eq-2}, independent variable, {dependent variable-1, dependent variable-2} [, initial condition-1, initial condition-2, initial condition-3, initial...
  • Page 202 2-8-45 Using the Action Menu u eliminate Function: Solves one equation with respect to a variable, and then replaces the same variable in another expression with the obtained result. Syntax: eliminate (Eq/Ineq/List-1, variable, Eq-2 [ ) ] • Ineq (inequality) includes the “≠” (not equal to) relational operator. Example: To transform + 3 to =, and substitute the result into 2...
  • Page 203 2-8-46 Using the Action Menu u and Function: Returns the result of the logical AND of two expressions. Syntax: Exp/Eq/Ineq/List-1 and Exp/Eq/Ineq/List-2 • Ineq (inequality) includes the “≠” (not equal to) relational operator. Example: To obtain the result of the logical AND of >...
  • Page 204: Using The Assistant Submenu

    2-8-47 Using the Action Menu Using the Assistant Submenu The [Assistant] submenu contains two commands related to the Assistant mode. • Note that the following commands are valid in the Assistant mode only. For more information on the Assistant mode see “Assistant Mode and Algebra Mode” on page 2-2-8. u arrange Function: Collects like terms and arranges them in descending order, starting with the term that contains the smallest coeffi...
  • Page 205: Using The Distribution Submenu

    2-8-48 Using the Action Menu u Clear_a_z Function: Clears all single-character variable names (a-z and A-Z) in the current folder. Using the Distribution Submenu The [Distribution] submenu includes functions related to each type of statistical calculation distribution probability. Note The functions on the [Distribution] submenu perform the same calculations as the Distribution commands that are available in the Statistics application and the Main, eActivity, and Program applications.
  • Page 206 2-8-49 Using the Action Menu u normCDf Function: Returns the cumulative probability of a normal distribution between a lower bound and an upper bound. σ μ Syntax: normCDf (lower value, upper value[, σ μ σ μ • When are skipped, = 1 and = 0 are used.
  • Page 207 2-8-50 Using the Action Menu u tCDf Function: Returns the cumulative probability of a Student- distribution between a lower bound and an upper bound. Syntax: tCDf (lower value, upper value, [ ) ] Example: To determine the Student- distribution probability when lower value = 1.5, upper value = ∞, = 18 Menu Item: [Action][Distribution][tCDf]...
  • Page 208 2-8-51 Using the Action Menu Menu Item: [Action][Distribution][invChiCDf] For more information, see “Inverse χ Cumulative Distribution” on page 7-11-10. u fPDf Function: Returns the probability density for a specified value. Syntax: fPDf ( [ ) ] Example: To determine the probability density when = 1.5, = 24,...
  • Page 209 2-8-52 Using the Action Menu u binomialCDf Function: Returns the cumulative probability in a binomial distribution that the success will occur on or before a specified trial. Syntax: binomialCDf ( , numtrial value, [ ) ] Example: To determine the binomial cumulative probability when = 5, numtrial value = = 0.63 Menu Item: [Action][Distribution][binomialCDf]...
  • Page 210 2-8-53 Using the Action Menu u poissonPDf Function: Returns the probability in a Poisson distribution that the success will occur on a specified trial. μ Syntax: poissonPDf ( [ ) ] μ Example: To determine the Poisson probability when = 10, Menu Item: [Action][Distribution][poissonPDf] For more information, see “Poisson Distribution Probability”...
  • Page 211 2-8-54 Using the Action Menu μ prob Example: To determine the minimum number of trials when = 0.8074, = 2.26 Menu Item: [Action][Distribution][invPoissonCDf] For more information, see “Inverse Poisson Cumulative Distribution” on page 7-11-19. u geoPDf Function: Returns the probability in a geometric distribution that the success will occur on a specified trial.
  • Page 212: Using The Command Submenu

    2-8-55 Using the Action Menu The calculation results of invGeoCDf are integers. Accuracy may be reduced when the first argument has 10 or more digits. Note that even a slight difference in calculation accuracy affects calculation results. If a warning message appears, check the displayed values.
  • Page 213: Using The Interactive Menu

    2-9-1 Using the Interactive Menu 2-9 Using the Interactive Menu The [Interactive] menu includes most of the commands that are on the [Action] menu. Selecting a command on the [Action] menu will simply execute the command. With the [Interactive] menu, on the other hand, selecting a command will display a dialog box prompting input of the arguments required by the command’s syntax (when necessary). The following are the differences between the [Interactive] menu and [Action] menu. Interactive Menu and Action Menu • With the [Action] menu, you select a command to input a function into the work area. • With the [Interactive] menu, you drag the stylus across existing input in the work area and then select a command. This encloses the highlighted expression with the command and opens a dialog box if more arguments are needed. • When you select an [Interactive] menu item without highlighting an expression first, a dialog box will open prompting you for the necessary arguments. • When a command requires multiple arguments, a dialog box appears prompting you for the arguments with the [Interactive] menu. • The [Interactive] menu has an “apply” command while the [Action] menu does not. • The “DispStat”, “Clear_a_z,” and “DelVar” commands of the [Action] menu’s [Command] submenu are not included on the [Interactive] menu. • Operation of the following [Interactive] menu commands is identical to the same commands on the [Action] menu. [Transformation], [Advanced], [Calculation], [Complex], [List-Create], [List-Calculation], [Matrix- Create], [Matrix-Calculation], [Vector], [Equation/Inequality], [Assistant], Define • For information about using these commands, see “2-8 Using the Action Menu”. Interactive Menu Example The following example shows how to use the [Transformation]-[factor] command from both the [Interactive] menu and the [Action] menu. Example: To factorize the expression – 3 + 3 – 1 u To factorize from the Interactive menu (1) In the work area, input the expression you want to factorize ( – 3 + 3...
  • Page 214 2-9-2 Using the Interactive Menu u To factorize from the Action menu (1) Tap [Action], [Transformation], and then [factor]. • This inputs “factor(” into the work area. (2) Input the expression you want to factorize – 3 + 3 – 1). (3) Tap w . • This factorizes the selected expression. • Though the above two procedures are quite different, they both produce the same result. [Interactive] menu operations come in handy in the following cases. • When you want to use a command on an expression you are calculating • When you want to use a command that requires multiple arguments When you use the [Interactive] menu to access a command that requires multiple arguments or if you access a command without first highlighting an expression, the dialog box that appears shows the number of arguments, the contents of each argument, and the input sequence. This lets you perform your input without worrying about command syntax. The following procedure shows an example of using the [Interactive] menu when three arguments need to be specified. Example: To obtain the definite integral of + 2 , 1 s s 2 u ClassPad Operation (1) In the work area, input the expression ( + 2 (2) Drag the stylus across the expression to select it. (3) Tap [Interactive], [Calculation], and then [ ∫ ]. • This displays the ∫...
  • Page 215 2-9-3 Using the Interactive Menu (4) On the dialog box, tap “Definite integral” to select it. • This displays boxes for specifying the variable and the lower limit and the upper limit. (5) Input the required data for each of the following three arguments. Variable: Lower: 1 Upper: (6) Tap [OK]. • This performs the calculation and displays the solution. • You can execute a command on the Interactive menu without selecting an expression in the work area. On the dialog box that appears, enter the expression you can to perform into the “Expression” box. Dialog box when an expression is selected Dialog box when no expression is selected. in the work area when you tap [Interactive] - [Calculation] - [∫]. 20060301...
  • Page 216: Using The "Apply" Command

    2-9-4 Using the Interactive Menu Using the “apply” Command The “apply” command is included on the [Interactive] menu only. You can use this command to execute only a specific part of an expression and display its result. Example: To calculate the result of diff(sin( ) × cos( ) + sin( ) × diff(cos( ), and then calculate only part of the expression Note • This procedure assumes that your ClassPad is configured with the following mode settings: Algebra, Complex, Radian, Descending Order. u ClassPad Operation (1) Input the example calculation provided above and execute it. • For details about differential calculations, see “2-8 Using the Action Menu”. (2) Drag the stylus across “diff(sin( )” to select it. (3) Tap [Interactive] and then [apply]. • This executes the part of the calculation you selected in step (2). The part of the calculation that is not selected (× cos( ) + sin( ) × diff(cos( )) is output to the display as-is. 20060301...
  • Page 217: Using The Main Application In Combination With Other Applications

    2-10-1 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications 2-10 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications You can access the windows of other ClassPad applications from the Main application and perform copy, paste, and other operations between them. This section explains how to access the windows of other applications from the Main application, and provides examples of the various operations you can perform between them. Important! • For details about the windows produced by each ClassPad application, see the chapter that covers the application. All of the explanations in this section assume that you are already familiar with the operations in the other ClassPad applications. Opening Another Application’s Window Use the following procedure to access the window of another application from the Main application window. u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap the right most toolbar down arrow button. • This displays a palette of application icons. Graph Graph Editor 3D Graph 3D Graph Editor Conics Graph Conics Editor Geometry Spreadsheet Stat Editor Differential Equation Editor Financial Probability Numeric Solver Sequence Editor Verify (2) Tap the button that corresponds to the window you want to display.
  • Page 218: Closing Another Application's Window

    2-10-2 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications Closing Another Application’s Window u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap anywhere inside of the window you would like to close. (2) Tap the S button in the upper right corner, or tap O and then [Close]. • The Main application work area expands to fill the entire display. • Even if you used the icon panel r icon to expand the lower window to fill the entire display, tapping O and then [Close] closes it and returns to the work area window. • Nothing happens if you tap O and then [Close] while the work area window is active. • For more information about enlarging one of the windows on a dual window display to fill the entire display (r), swapping the contents of the upper window and lower window (S), making a window active, and other window operations, see “Using a Dual Window Display” on page 1-5-1. Using the Graph Window $ and 3D Graph Window % Dragging a function from the work area to the Graph window $ graphs it in the format of Dragging a function from the work area to the 3D Graph window % graphs it in the format of x , y Example: To execute the expression factor( – 1) in the work area, and then graph – 1 u ClassPad Operation...
  • Page 219 2-10-3 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications (3) Drag the stylus across “ ^2 – 1” in the work area to select it. (4) Drag the selected expression to the Graph window. • This graphs – 1. This graph reveals that the -intercepts are = ±1. • As can be seen in the above example, a graph can be drawn when you drop an expression in the form of ) into the Graph window. In the case of the 3D Graph window, the expression must be in the form of • For more information about the Graph window, see Chapter 3. For more information about the 3D Graph window, see Chapter 5. 20060301...
  • Page 220: Using A Graph Editor Window (Graph & Table: ! , Conics: * , 3D Graph: @ , Numeric Solver: 1 )

    2-10-4 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications Using a Graph Editor Window (Graph & Table: ! , Conics: * , 3D Graph: @ , Numeric Solver: 1 ) You can copy expressions by dragging them between the work area window and the Graph Editor, Conics Editor, 3D Graph Editor, and Numeric Solver windows. Example: To copy an expression in the work area by dragging it to the Graph Editor window u ClassPad Operation (1) On the work area window, tap ! to display the Graph Editor window in the lower w indow. • If you already have some functions input in the Graph & Table application, those functions will be displayed on the Graph Editor window. (2) In the work area, drag the stylus across the expression you want to copy so it is selected. (3) Drag the selected expression to the location on the Graph Editor window where you want to copy it. • This makes the Graph Editor window active and copies the expression to the location where you dropped it. 20060301...
  • Page 221: Using The Stat Editor Window

    2-10-5 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications (4) Press E to register the expression. • The copied expression is displayed in natural format, with the check box next to it selected. • You could now tap $ to graph the function. • For more information about the Graph Editor window, see Chapter 3. For more information about the Conics Graph Editor window, see Chapter 4. For more information about the 3D Graph Editor window, see Chapter 5. For more information about the Numeric Solver window, see Chapter 9. Using the Stat Editor Window ( You can use the Stat Editor window to create new LIST variables and edit existing LIST variables. You can also use the Stat Editor window to display the contents of a LIST variable created using the work area by specifying the LIST variable’s name. Example List Operation The following are the general steps for using the Stat Editor. The steps indicated in parentheses refer to the steps under “ClassPad Operation” below. 1. Display the Stat Editor (step (1)) and input data for two LIST variables named “list1” and “list2” (step (2)). 2. On the work area window, perform calculations that use “list1” and “list2” (steps (3) and (4)). 3. Use the work area to assign numbers to a variable and create a new LIST variable (steps (5) and (6)). 4. Display the Stat Editor window and recall the LIST variable you created (steps (7), (8) and (9)). 20060301...
  • Page 222 2-10-6 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications u ClassPad Operation (1) On the work area window, tap ( to display the Stat Editor window in the lower window. (2) Input the following list data into the lists named “list1” and “list2”. list1 = {1, 2, 3} list2 = {4, 5, 6} (3) Make the work area window active, and then perform the following calculation: list1 + list2 S list3. • You could also input “list3:=list1+list2” to produce the same result. 20060301...
  • Page 223 2-10-7 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications (4) Tap the Stat Editor window to make it active. • Here you can see that list3 contains the result of list1 + list2. (5) Tap the work area window to make it active. (6) Perform the operation {12, 24, 36}⇒test, which assigns the list data {12, 24, 36} to the LIST variable named “test”. 20060301...
  • Page 224 2-10-8 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications (7) Tap the Stat Editor window to make it active. (8) Scroll the screen to the right until the blank list to the right of “list6” is visible. (9) Tap the blank cell next to “list6”, input “test”, and then tap w . • This displays the list data {12, 24, 36}, which is assigned to the variable named “test”. • At this point you can perform list editing operations like append, delete, edit, etc. • list1 through list6 are LIST type system variables. For more information, see “1-7 Variables and Folders”. • For information about inputting and editing list data using the Stat Editor, see Chapter 7. 20060301...
  • Page 225: Using The Geometry Window 3

    2-10-9 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications Using the Geometry Window 3 When there is a Geometry window on the display, you can drag values and expressions to the Geometry window to draw the graph or figure of the value or expression. You can also drag a figure from the Geometry window to the work area, which displays the corresponding expression or value. Dragging an Expression from the Work Area to the Geometry Window Example: To input the expressions = 1 and = 1 in the work area, and then drag them to the Geometry window u ClassPad Operation (1) Input the two expressions into the work area. (2) Tap 3 to display the Geometry window in the lower window. The Geometry window that initially appears is blank. • (3) Drag the stylus across = 1 in the work area to select it. (4) Drag the selected expression to the Geometry window. An ellipse appears in the Geometry window. • 20060301...
  • Page 226 2-10-10 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications (5) Drag the stylus across = 1 in the work area to select it. (6) Drag the selected expression to the Geometry window. A circle appears in the Geometry window. • • The following table shows the types of expressions you can drop into the Geometry window. Dropping this into the Geometry window: Displays this: Linear equation in x and y An infinite line Equation of circle in x and y A circle Equation of ellipse in x and y An ellipse...
  • Page 227: Using The Sequence Editor Window

    2-10-11 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications Dragging a Figure from the Geometry Window to the Work Area The following shows what happens when you drag a figure from the Geometry window to the work area. Displays this: Dropping this into the work area: Coordinates as a vector (2 × 1 matrix) Point Line Equation of the line An ordered pair (head of vector Vector assuming the tail is at the origin) Corresponding equation...
  • Page 228: Using Verify

    2-11-1 Using Verify 2-11 Using Verify Verify provides you with a powerful tool to check whether your numeric or algebraic manipulations are correct. Verify will assist you in simplifying an expression by verifying whether or not the expression you entered is equivalent to your original expression. If it is, you will get a pleasant response;...
  • Page 229: Verify Menus And Buttons

    2-11-2 Using Verify Verify Menus and Buttons This section provides basic information about Verify menus, commands, and buttons. • O menu items are the same for all applications. For more information, see “Using the O Menu” on page 1-5-4. k File Menu Select this File To do this: menu item: Discard the current window contents and create a new file Open an existing file...
  • Page 230: Using Verify

    2-11-3 Using Verify k Verify Buttons To do this: Tap this Verify button: Clear the Verify window (same as the Clear All command) Open or save a file (Main application only) Specify the complex number calculation range for Verify Specify the real number calculation range for Verify Specify the positive real number calculation range for Verify Verify the equation starting from the first line Verify the equation starting from the current line...
  • Page 231 2-11-4 Using Verify (4) Following the equal sign (=), input 25 × 3 and tap w . (5) Tap [OK] to close the error dialog that appears. (6) Change 25 × 3 to 25 × 2 and tap w . (7) Following the next equal sign (=), input 5 ×...
  • Page 232: Using Probability

    2-12-1 Using Probability 2-12 Using Probability You can use Probability to simulate the following. • The die faces that will appear when a single die is thrown a specified number of times (1 Die) • The sum of the data of dice faces that will appear when a pair of dice is shown a specified number of times (2 Dice +) •...
  • Page 233: Starting Up Probability

    2-12-2 Using Probability Starting Up Probability Use the following procedure to start up Probability. u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap the right most toolbar down arrow button. (2) On the icon palette that appears, tap P . • This will display an initial Probability dialog box like the one shown below.
  • Page 234 2-12-3 Using Probability k Edit Menu Select this Edit To do this: menu item: Copy the currently selected object (trial information or trial result) and Copy place it onto the clipboard Display the Probability dialog box and try the probability emulation (the trial result will be added to the end of the current file) Delete the currently selected trial data Delete Clear the Probability window (and display the Probability dialog box)
  • Page 235: Using Probability

    2-12-4 Using Probability Using Probability The following examples show the basic steps for using Probability. Example 1: To obtain the sum data when a two six-sided die are thrown 50 times u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap the right most toolbar down arrow button. (2) On the icon palette that appears, tap P .
  • Page 236 2-12-5 Using Probability Example 2: To obtain the product data when a two six-sided die are thrown 150 times (This example assumes you are continuing from Example 1.) (1) Tap P to display the Probability dialog box. (2) Tap the button next to “2 Dice ” to select it. (3) Enter 150 into the “Number of trials” box. • Leave the value in the “Number of faces” box at it initial default value (6). (4) Tap [OK]. • The result will appear in the Probability window. Example 3: After putting 10 A-balls, 2- B-balls, and 30 C-balls into a box, determine how many times each type of ball will be drawn when there is a total of 50 draws. Each time a ball is drawn, it should be replaced into the box before the next draw. (This example assumes you are continuing from Example 2.) (1) Tap P to display the Probability dialog box. (2) Tap the button next to “Container” to select it. 20060301...
  • Page 237 2-12-6 Using Probability (3) Configure the following settings on the dialog box. • Replace: Yes (Indicates the ball is replaced before the next draw. If the ball is not replaced, select “No”.) • A: 10, B: 20, C: 30 (Leaver other letters set to zero.) • Number of trials: 50 (4) Tap [OK]. • The result will appear in the Probability window. 20060301...
  • Page 238: Running A Program In The Main Application

    2-13-1 Running a Program in the Main Application 2-13 Running a Program in the Main Application You can run a program in the Main application or the eActivity application. Syntax: Folder name\Program name(parameter) • You do not need to specify the folder name if the program you want to run is in the current folder.
  • Page 239 2-13-2 Running a Program in the Main Application Example: To run the program named OCTA that we created and stored under “Creating  and Saving a Program” (page 12-2-1) from the Main application, and determine the surface area and of a regular octahedron with a side length of 20 cm u ClassPad Operation (1) Perform the key operation below in the Main application work area.
  • Page 240: Chapter 3 Using The Graph & Table Application

    Chapter Using the Graph & Table Application The Graph & Table application allows you to input and graph rectangular coordinate equations (or inequalities), polar coordinate equations, and parametric expressions. After you graph an expression, you can zoom in or out, and move a pointer along the graph, displaying its coordinates as you go.
  • Page 241: Graph & Table Application Overview

    3-1-1 Graph & Table Application Overview 3-1 Graph & Table Application Overview This section describes the configuration of the Graph & Table application windows and provides basic information about its menus and commands. Starting Up the Graph & Table Application Use the following procedure to start up the Graph &...
  • Page 242: Graph & Table Application Menus And Buttons

    3-1-2 Graph & Table Application Overview You can also use a function on the Graph Editor window to generate a number table or a summary table. Number tables and summary tables are displayed in a Table window. Table window Graph & Table Application Menus and Buttons This section explains the operations you can perform using the Graph &...
  • Page 243 3-1-3 Graph & Table Application Overview Tap this Or select this To do this: button: menu item: Type - > Type Type - < Type Input a rectangular coordinate type inequality Type - t Type Type - s Type Type - >...
  • Page 244 3-1-4 Graph & Table Application Overview k Graph Window Menus and Buttons Tap this Or select this To do this: button: menu item: Cut the character string selected in the message box — Edit - Cut and place it onto the clipboard Copy the character string selected in the message box —...
  • Page 245 3-1-5 Graph & Table Application Overview Tap this Or select this To do this: button: menu item: Display the coordinates at a particular point on a graph Analysis - Trace Insert a point, graphic, or text into an existing graph —...
  • Page 246 3-1-6 Graph & Table Application Overview Tap this Or select this To do this: button: menu item: a - Inequality Plot - Specify “AND Plot” as the inequality plot setting — a - Inequality Plot - Specify “OR Plot” as the inequality plot setting —...
  • Page 247: Graph & Table Application Status Bar

    3-1-7 Graph & Table Application Overview Tap this Or select this To do this: button: menu item: Make the Graph Editor window active — Display the View Window dialog box to configure Graph O - View Window window settings Display the Table Input dialog box for configuring settings —...
  • Page 248 3-1-8 Graph & Table Application Overview Example 1: To input the function on Sheet 1 and graph it u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap T. • This starts the Graph & Table application. (2) In the Graph Editor window, tap the input box immediately to the right of line number •...
  • Page 249 3-1-9 Graph & Table Application Overview (4) Tap $ . • This graphs the expression. The expression is displayed in the message box while the graph is being drawn. • The Graph window message box is for both input and output. It displays information about the function and other information.
  • Page 250 3-1-10 Graph & Table Application Overview θ Example 2: To input the function = 3sin2 into line 2 of Sheet 1 and graph it In Example 1, we graphed a rectangular expression in the form of ). You can also input polar coordinate expressions, inequalities, and other types of functions for graphing as well.
  • Page 251 3-1-11 Graph & Table Application Overview (4) Tap $ . • Since there are check marks next to both “ 1” and “ 2”, both expressions are graphed. 20060301...
  • Page 252: Using The Graph Window

    3-2-1 Using the Graph Window 3-2 Using the Graph Window This section explains Graph window operations, including configuring display settings, scrolling, zooming the image, and more. Configuring View Window Parameters for the Graph Window The View Window dialog box lets you specify the maximum and minimum values for each axis, the space between the marks on each axis (the scale), and other graph display parameters.
  • Page 253 3-2-2 Using the Graph Window • You can also use the rectangular coordinate View Window dialog box to select -log graph, -log graph, or -log graph. To select this type of graph: Do this: -log graph Select the -log check box. •...
  • Page 254 3-2-3 Using the Graph Window u View Window parameter precautions • An error occurs if you input 0 for t θ step. • An error also occurs if you input a value that is out of range for a parameter, if you input a minus sign only, or if you perform any other illegal input.
  • Page 255: Using View Window Memory

    3-2-4 Using the Graph Window u To standardize the View Window (1) On the application menu, tap T . (2) Tap 6 . This displays the View Window dialog box. (3) Tap [Memory] and then [Standard]. This applies the standard View Window parameters shown below.
  • Page 256: Viewing Graph Window Coordinates

    3-2-5 Using the Graph Window u To recall a setup from View Window memory (1) On the application menu, tap T . (2) Tap 6 . This displays the View Window dialog box. (3) Tap [Memory] and then [Recall]. This displays a list of names of the View Window setups you have stored in memory.
  • Page 257: Scrolling The Graph Window

    3-2-6 Using the Graph Window Scrolling the Graph Window After drawing a graph, you can use either of the two operations to scroll it up, down, left, or right. • Tap the graph controller arrows at the edges of the Graph window. •...
  • Page 258: Zooming The Graph Window

    3-2-7 Using the Graph Window Zooming the Graph Window Your ClassPad provides you with a wide selection of zoom commands that you can use to enlarge or reduce an entire graph or a specific area of a graph. k Zoom Commands The Graph window’s [Zoom] menu contains the zoom commands described in the table below.
  • Page 259 3-2-8 Using the Graph Window u To use box zoom Example: To use box zoom to enlarge part of the graph + 5)( + 4)( + 3) (1) On the application menu, tap T. (2) On the Graph Editor window, input + 5)( + 4)( + 3).
  • Page 260: Using Quick Zoom

    3-2-9 Using the Graph Window (6) Input 5 for both the Factor and Factor, and then tap [OK]. (7) Tap T , and then use the stylus to drag the screen image so the part you want to zoom is in the center of the screen. (8) Tap [Zoom] and then [Zoom In].
  • Page 261: Other Graph Window Operations

    3-2-10 Using the Graph Window k Using Other Zoom Menu Commands The [Auto], [Original], [Square], [Round], [Integer], and [Previous] zoom commands are executed as soon as you tap one of them on the Graph window’s [Zoom] menu. For information about what each command does, see “Zoom Commands” on page 3-2-7. •...
  • Page 262 3-2-11 Using the Graph Window k Redrawing a Graph Use the following procedure to redraw a graph when necessary. u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap the Graph window to make it active. (2) Tap a and then [ReDraw]. • While the Graph Editor window is active, you can redraw the graph by tapping $ . Important! •...
  • Page 263: Storing Functions

    3-3-1 Storing Functions 3-3 Storing Functions Use the Graph Editor window to store a Graph & Table application function. This section covers Graph Editor operations, and explains how to store functions. Using Graph Editor Sheets The Graph Editor window has five tabbed sheets named Sheet 1 through Sheet 5, each of which can contain up to 20 functions.
  • Page 264: Specifying The Function Type

    3-3-2 Storing Functions k Returning Sheets to Their Default Names The procedure below returns the sheet names to their initial default names (Sheet 1 through Sheet 5). u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap the Graph Editor window to make it active. (2) Tap a, [Sheet], and then [Default Name]. •...
  • Page 265: Storing A Function

    3-3-3 Storing Functions u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap T. (2) On the Graph Editor window, tap the down arrow next to “ =”, or tap [Type]. (3) On the list that appears, tap the function type you want to select. Storing a Function This section presents a number of examples that illustrate how to store a Graph &...
  • Page 266 3-3-4 Storing Functions u To store an = equation Example: To store in line (1) On the Graph Editor window, tap [Type] and then [ =Type] to specify an = equation. (2) Tap the box to the right of line number “ 4”, and then input the equation: (3) Press E to store the equation.
  • Page 267: Using Built-In Functions

    3-3-5 Storing Functions Using Built-in Functions Your ClassPad is pre-programmed with the commonly used functions listed below. You can recall a built-in function, save it to an Graph Editor sheet, assign values to its coefficients, and graph the results. a·x a·x^ b·x a·x^ b·x^ c·x...
  • Page 268: Editing Stored Functions

    3-3-6 Storing Functions u To save an expression from the message box to the Graph Editor window (1) Tap the Graph window to make it active. (2) Perform a Trace operation (see “3-7 Using Trace”) or any other operation that causes the message box to appear. (3) Tap inside the message box to select the entire expression or drag the stylus across the part of the expression you want to select.
  • Page 269: Deleting All Graph Editor Expressions

    3-3-7 Storing Functions Deleting All Graph Editor Expressions Use the following procedure to delete all of the expressions on all Graph Editor sheets, and initialize all of the sheet names. (1) On the Graph Editor window, tap [Edit] and then [Clear All]. (2) In response to the confirmation dialog box that appears, tap [OK] to delete all expressions and initialize sheet names.
  • Page 270 3-3-8 Storing Functions k Specifying the Function You Want to Graph On the Graph Editor window, you can select one or more functions for graphing by selecting their check boxes. The functions whose check boxes are cleared are not graphed. • This check box is selected, so the function next to it will be graphed when you tap $ .
  • Page 271 3-3-9 Storing Functions k Quick Graphing of an Expression Using Drag and Drop You can use the following procedure to graph a single function, even when you have multiple functions selected on the Graph Editor window. u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap the tab of the sheet that contains the function you want to graph to make it active. (2) Drag the function you want to graph to the Graph window.
  • Page 272 3-3-10 Storing Functions (3) Tap $ . AND Plot OR Plot 20060301...
  • Page 273 3-3-11 Storing Functions k Shading the Region Bounded by Two Expressions You can shade the region bounded by two expressions by specifying [ShadeType] as the function type and then inputting the expressions in the syntax shown below. Syntax: {lower function ), upper function A < < B The value of B must be greater than A.
  • Page 274 3-3-12 Storing Functions k Using the Draw Shade Dialog Box to Shade the Region Bounded by Two Expressions In this case, you input the expressions on a Draw Shade dialog box instead of the Graph Editor Window. Example: To graph ) = –1, ) = 1, –1 < < 1 u ClassPad Operation (1) On the menu, tap [Draw Shade].
  • Page 275 3-3-13 Storing Functions k Dropping an Expression from the Main Application Work Area into the Graph Window • You can graph a polar coordinate expression by dragging it from the Main Application work area and dropping it into the Graph window. • If there are multiple expressions in the same Main Application work area line, all of the expressions will be graphed when you drop the line into the Graph window.
  • Page 276: Saving Graph Editor Data To Graph Memory

    3-3-14 Storing Functions Saving Graph Editor Data to Graph Memory Graph memory lets you store all of the expressions and their related information to a file for later recall. Each graph memory file contains the following data: • Functions on all five Graph Editor sheets (up to 100 functions) •...
  • Page 277: Using Table & Graph

    3-4-1 Using Table & Graph 3-4 Using Table & Graph The Graph & Table application includes a “Table window” for displaying number tables and summary tables generated with the functions you input on the Graph Editor window. Generating a Number Table You can use either of the following two methods to generate a number table using a Graph &...
  • Page 278 3-4-2 Using Table & Graph u To generate a number table by specifying a range of values for using the Table Input dialog box Example: To generate a number table for the function – 2 as the value of changes from –3 to 1 in increments of 1 (1) On the application menu, tap T. (2) In line 1 of the Graph Editor window, input and save –...
  • Page 279 3-4-3 Using Table & Graph u To generate a number table by assigning list values to (1) Create and save the list of values to be assigned. list1 = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (2) In line 1 of the Graph & Table application Graph Editor window, input and save –...
  • Page 280: Editing Number Table Values

    3-4-4 Using Table & Graph k Table Generation Precautions • Table generation is performed using the currently selected function that is of the current function type selected on the Graph Editor window toolbar. Current function type • Though the selected current function type is “ =”...
  • Page 281: Deleting, Inserting, And Adding Number Table Lines

    3-4-5 Using Table & Graph • An error message appears and the number table contents are not changed if you enter an illegal (such as 6 ÷ 0). value for • The data in a “Y” column (Y1, Y2, etc.) of a table cannot be modified. Deleting, Inserting, and Adding Number Table Lines You can use the following procedures to delete, insert, and add number table lines.
  • Page 282: Regenerating A Number Table

    3-4-6 Using Table & Graph u To add a number table line (1) Tap the -value of the bottom line of the number table. (2) Tap [T-Fact] and then [Add]. Added line The new line contains the same values as the bottom line of the number table. •...
  • Page 283: Generating A Number Table And Using It To Draw A Graph

    3-4-7 Using Table & Graph Generating a Number Table and Using It to Draw a Graph After using a function to generate a number table, you can use the number table values to draw a graph. You can use number table values to draw two different types of graphs: a “connect type graph”...
  • Page 284: Saving A Number Table To A List

    3-4-8 Using Table & Graph (6) Specify the graph type. • To specify a connect type graph, tap [Graph] and then [G-Connect], or tap $ . To specify a plot type graph, tap [Graph] and then [G-Plot], or tap ! . •...
  • Page 285: Generating A Summary Table

    3-4-9 Using Table & Graph (2) Tap a and then [Table to List]. • This displays a dialog box for specifying a variable name. (3) Enter the name you want to give to the variable, and then tap [OK]. • This assigns the list of data you selected to a variable with the name you specified. •...
  • Page 286 3-4-10 Using Table & Graph u Specifying all -values This method generates a reference table by looking up data stored in a list. A LIST variable is used to specify the -values. When using this method, it is up to you specify all of the correct -values required to generate the summary table.
  • Page 287 3-4-11 Using Table & Graph (4) Tap [Memory] and then [Auto]. • This causes all settings on the View Window dialog box to change to “Auto”. (5) Tap the [OK] button to close the View Window dialog box. (6) Tap u to toggle to toolbar 2 and then tap 4 . •...
  • Page 288 3-4-12 Using Table & Graph • Tapping $ here graphs the function using the View Window settings automatically configured for summary table generation. Important! • A monotone increasing function or other special function may not be solvable by the ClassPad’s internal summary table calculation. If this happens, use the procedure under “Generating a Summary Table by Specifying All of the Values for ”...
  • Page 289 3-4-13 Using Table & Graph (3) Tap 6 to display the View Window dialog box. (4) Specify the -values for the summary table by specifying values for the [xmin] and [xmax] settings. • For this example, we will specify xmin = –0.5 and xmax = 2. (5) Tap the [OK] button to close the View Window dialog box.
  • Page 290 3-4-14 Using Table & Graph k Generating a Summary Table by Specifying All of the Values for In both of the previous examples, summary table generation is performed using View Window settings to calculate values for that satisfy the function ) = 0. With this table ( generation method, -values are not calculated automatically. It is up to you to use a LIST variable to specify all of the -values that appear in the summary table.
  • Page 291: Making The Graph Editor Window The Active Window

    3-4-15 Using Table & Graph (4) Input the values you want to specify for into list1. • Here, we will input the following values: = –2, –1, 0, 1, 2. (5) Tap the Graph Editor window to make it active. (6) Tap 4 .
  • Page 292: Modifying A Graph

    3-5-1 Modifying a Graph 3-5 Modifying a Graph A graph can be modified in real time as you change its coefficients and/or the variables. The Graph & Table application provides you with two methods for modifying a graph. Direct Modify “Direct Modify” changes the coefficient in the equation of the original graph. This method can be used when you are modifying a single graph.
  • Page 293 3-5-2 Modifying a Graph (6) Input the amount of change (step) in the coefficient value, and then tap [OK]. • This causes “Modify” to appear on the Graph window and the 1 graph (2 + 3 –1) to become active, which is indicated by a thick graph line. • The function of the currently active graph is displayed in the Graph window message box. (7) In the function displayed in the message box, select the coefficient you want to change. (8) Tap the left or right graph controller button to change the value of the coefficient you selected in step (7). To do this: Do this: Increase the value of the coefficient Tap the right graph controller arrow. Decrease the value of the coefficient Tap the left graph controller arrow. • You can use the Dynamic Graph dialog box on page 3-5-4 to change the increment, if you want.
  • Page 294 3-5-3 Modifying a Graph (9) To modify the 2 graph (2 + 1), tap the down graph controller arrow to make it the graph active. • You can use the up and down cursor keys or graph controller arrows to switch between the two graphs, as required. • Repeat steps (7) and (8) to modify the currently selected graph. Tap . Tap . (10) To quit graph modification, tap on the icon panel. • This causes “Modify” to disappear from the display, returning to the normal Graph window. 20060301...
  • Page 295: Simultaneously Modifying Multiple Graphs By Changing Common Variables (Dynamic Modify)

    3-5-4 Modifying a Graph Simultaneously Modifying Multiple Graphs by Changing Common Variables (Dynamic Modify) Use the procedure below to change the values of up to two common variables used in multiple functions to simultaneously modify the graphs. u To modify multiple graphs simultaneously Example: To graph the functions – , and then find out how a change in variable from 1 to 4 and a change in variable from –2 to 2 affect the shape...
  • Page 296 3-5-5 Modifying a Graph (10) Tap [OK]. • This displays a WARNING! dialog box for overwriting variable a . (11) Tap [OK]. • This displays a WARNING! dialog box for overwriting variable b . (12) Tap [OK]. • This graphs the functions using the variable start values you specified on the Dynamic Graph dialog box, and displays “Modify”...
  • Page 297 3-5-6 Modifying a Graph k Cycling Through Graph Changes Automatically Use the following procedure to cycle automatically through graph changes in accordance with the settings you configure on the Dynamic Graph dialog box. u ClassPad Operation (1) Perform steps (1) through (9) under “To modify multiple graphs simultaneously” on page 3-5-4.
  • Page 298: Using The Sketch Menu

    3-6-1 Using the Sketch Menu 3-6 Using the Sketch Menu The [Sketch] menu lets you add points, lines, figures, and text after you draw a graph. You can also add tangent and normal lines to your graph. Sketch Menu Overview To access the [Sketch] menu, tap [Analysis] and then [Sketch]. The following table describes the commands that are available on the [Sketch] menu.
  • Page 299 3-6-2 Using the Sketch Menu u To draw a line on the Graph window (1) While the Graph window is active, tap [Analysis], [Sketch], and then [Line]. (2) On the Graph window, tap the start point of the line and then tap the end point. This causes a straight line to be drawn between the two points. The message box shows the equation of the line.
  • Page 300 3-6-3 Using the Sketch Menu u To draw a line tangent to a graph Example: To draw a line tangent to the graph – – 2 when (1) In line 1 of the Graph Editor window, input and save – – 2. (2) Tap $ to graph the function. (3) Tap [Analysis], [Sketch], and then [Tangent].
  • Page 301 3-6-4 Using the Sketch Menu u To graph the inverse of a function Example: To graph – – 2 and then overlay it with – – 2 (1) In line 1 of the Graph Editor window, input and save – – 2. (2) Tap $ to graph the function. (3) Tap [Analysis], [Sketch], and then [Inverse].
  • Page 302 3-6-5 Using the Sketch Menu u To draw a vertical or horizontal line Example: To draw a vertical line at (1) While the Graph window is active, tap [Analysis], [Sketch], and then [Vertical]. • This displays “Vertical” on the Graph window, and the ClassPad waits for you to draw the vertical line.
  • Page 303: Using Trace

    3-7-1 Using Trace 3-7 Using Trace Trace lets you move a point along a graph and displays the coordinates for the current pointer location. You can also link the trace operation to the number table used to draw a graph, so the pointer jumps to the coordinates that are currently selected in the table. Using Trace to Read Graph Coordinates Starting the trace operation causes a crosshair pointer to appear on the graph.
  • Page 304 3-7-2 Using Trace • You can also move the pointer to a particular point by inputting coordinates. Pressing a number key displays a dialog box for inputting coordinates. Input the values you want and then tap [OK]. • When there are multiple graphs on the Graph window, you can use the up and down cursor keys or the up and down graph controller arrows to move the pointer between graphs.
  • Page 305: Linking Trace To A Number Table

    3-7-3 Using Trace Linking Trace to a Number Table This section explains how you can link the movement of the trace pointer to the values in the number table used to draw the graph. This type of operation is called “linked trace”. • For information about generating a number table and performing other table operations, see “3-4 Using Table &...
  • Page 306: Generating Number Table Values From A Graph

    3-7-4 Using Trace Generating Number Table Values from a Graph A “graph-to-table” feature lets you extract the coordinate values at the current pointer location and input them into a table. Example: Generate a table and graph for the expression – 3 , and input the coordinates for specific points on the graph into a table Use the initial View Window settings (page 3-2-3).
  • Page 307 3-7-5 Using Trace (4) Tap the Graph window to make it active. Next, tap [Analysis] and then [Trace]. • This causes a pointer to appear on the graph. (5) Use the cursor key to move the pointer along the graph until it reaches a point whose coordinates you want to input into the table.
  • Page 308: Analyzing A Function Used To Draw A Graph

    3-8-1 Analyzing a Function Used to Draw a Graph 3-8 Analyzing a Function Used to Draw a Graph Your ClassPad includes a G-Solve feature that lets you perform a variety of different analytical processes on an existing graph. G-Solve Menu Overview To access the [G-Solve] menu, tap [Analysis] and then [G-Solve]. The following describes the commands that are available on the [G-Solve] menu.
  • Page 309: Using G-Solve Menu Commands

    3-8-2 Analyzing a Function Used to Draw a Graph Using G-Solve Menu Commands This section describes how to use each of the commands on the [G-Solve] menu. Note that all of the procedures in this section are performed in the Graph & Table application, which you can enter by tapping the T icon on the application menu.
  • Page 310 3-8-3 Analyzing a Function Used to Draw a Graph u To obtain the minimum value, maximum value, Max, Min, -intercept, and inflection of a function Example: To graph the function + 2)( – 2) and obtain its minimum value (1) Display the View Window dialog box, and then configure it with the following parameters.
  • Page 311 3-8-4 Analyzing a Function Used to Draw a Graph u To obtain the point of intersection for two graphs Example: To graph the functions + 1 and , and determine their point of intersection (1) Display the View Window dialog box, and then configure it with the following parameters.
  • Page 312 3-8-5 Analyzing a Function Used to Draw a Graph u To determine coordinates at a particular point on a graph Example: To graph the function + 2)( – 2) and determine the -coordinate when = 0.5, and the -coordinate when = 2.2 (1) Display the View Window dialog box, and then configure it with the following parameters.
  • Page 313 3-8-6 Analyzing a Function Used to Draw a Graph u To determine the definite integral for a particular domain Example: To graph the function + 2)( – 2) and obtain its definite integral in the domain of 1 < < 2 (1) Display the View Window dialog box, and then configure it with the following parameters.
  • Page 314 3-8-7 Analyzing a Function Used to Draw a Graph u To determine the distance between any two points (1) Tap the Graph window to make it active. (2) Tap [Analysis], [G-Solve], and then [Distance]. • This displays “Distance” on the Graph window, and the ClassPad waits for you to specify the first point.
  • Page 315 3-8-8 Analyzing a Function Used to Draw a Graph (2) On the Graph Editor window, input and store – 1 into line 1, and then tap $ to graph it. • Make sure that only “ 1” is selected (checked). (3) Tap [Analysis], [G-Solve], and then [Inflection].
  • Page 316 3-8-9 Analyzing a Function Used to Draw a Graph (4) Press 1. • This displays a dialog box for inputting an interval of values for , with 1 specified for the lower limit of the -axis (Lower). (5) Tap the [Upper] input box and then input 2 for the upper limit of the -axis.
  • Page 317: Chapter 4 Using The Conics Application

    Chapter Using the Conics Application The Conics application provides you with the capability to graph circular, parabolic, elliptic, and hyperbolic functions. You can also use the Conics application to quickly and easily determine the proper focal point, vertex, directrix, axis of symmetry, latus rectum, center, radius, asymptote, eccentricity, and even the - and -intercepts of each type of conics.
  • Page 318: Conics Application Overview

    4-1-1 Conics Application Overview 4-1 Conics Application Overview This section describes the configuration of the Conics application windows, and provides basic information about its menus and commands. • The Conics application uses many of the same commands (Zoom, Trace, Sketch, etc.) as the Graph &...
  • Page 319: Conics Application Menus And Buttons

    4-1-2 Conics Application Overview • The Conics Editor window can have one conics equation input at a time. The Conics application includes a number of preset conics formats (page 4-2-1) that make equation input quick and easy. • You can tap the graph controller arrows (page 3-2-6) or use the cursor key to scroll the Conics Graph window.
  • Page 320 4-1-3 Conics Application Overview k Conics Graph Window Menus and Buttons The following describes the menu and button operations you can perform while the Conics Graph window is active. Tap this Or select this To do this: button: menu item: Enlarge the part of the screen bounded by a box Zoom - Box Specify a zoom factor...
  • Page 321: Conics Application Status Bar

    4-1-4 Conics Application Overview Tap this Or select this To do this: button: menu item: Save a graph as image data (page 3-2-10) a - Store Picture — Recall the image of a graph (page 3-2-10) a - Recall Picture —...
  • Page 322: Inputting Equations

    4-2-1 Inputting Equations 4-2 Inputting Equations This section explains the various ways you can input equations using the Conics Editor window. Using a Conics Form to Input an Equation Preset formats can help you input conics equations quickly and easily. The following table contains a complete list of the types of equations that you can input just by tapping [Form] and then [Insert Conics Form].
  • Page 323 4-2-2 Inputting Equations u To input an equation using a Conics Form Example: To use a Conics Form to input the equation for a parabola with a horizontal axis (principal axis parallel with -axis) (1) On the application menu, tap C to start the Conics application. (2) On the Conics Editor window, tap q , or tap [Form] and then [Insert Conics Form].
  • Page 324: Inputting An Equation Manually

    4-2-3 Inputting Equations Inputting an Equation Manually To input an equation manually, make the Conics Editor window active, and then use the soft keyboard for input. Input the equation here. Conics Editor window Transforming a Manually Input Equation to a Conics Form After you manually input an equation on the Conics Editor window, you can use the procedure below to transform it to a preset Conics Form.
  • Page 325: Drawing A Conics Graph

    4-3-1 Drawing a Conics Graph 4-3 Drawing a Conics Graph This section provides examples that show how to draw various types of conics graphs. Drawing a Parabola A parabola can be drawn with either a horizontal or vertical orientation. The parabola type is determined by the direction of its principal axis.
  • Page 326 4-3-2 Drawing a Conics Graph Example 2: To draw the parabola u ClassPad Operation (1) In step (2) of the above procedure, select “X = AY + BY + C” on the Select Conics Form dialog box. (2) In step (3) of the above procedure, change the coefficients of the equation as follows: A = 1, B = 2, C = 3.
  • Page 327 4-3-3 Drawing a Conics Graph k Drawing a Parabola that Opens Vertically A parabola with a vertical axis is one whose principal axis is parallel to the -axis. There are two possible equations for a parabola with a vertical axis: = A( –...
  • Page 328: Drawing A Circle

    4-3-4 Drawing a Conics Graph Drawing a Circle There are two forms that you can use to draw a circle. One form is the standard form, which allows you to specify the center point and radius. The other form is the general form, which allows you to specify the coefficients of each term.
  • Page 329: Drawing An Ellipse

    4-3-5 Drawing a Conics Graph k Drawing a Circle by Specifying the Coefficients of a General Equation Example: To draw the circle – 6 + 9 = 0 u ClassPad Operation (1) In step (2) of the procedure under “Drawing a Circle by Specifying a Center Point and Radius”, select “AX + AY + BX + CY + D = 0”.
  • Page 330: Drawing A Hyperbola

    4-3-6 Drawing a Conics Graph Drawing a Hyperbola A hyperbola can be drawn with either a horizontal or vertical orientation. The hyperbola type is determined by the direction of its principal axis. k Drawing a Hyperbola that Opens Horizontally – H) –...
  • Page 331 4-3-7 Drawing a Conics Graph k Drawing a Hyperbola that Opens Vertically – K) – H) – = 1. The standard form of a hyperbola with a vertical axis is: u ClassPad Operation (1) In step (2) of the procedure under “Drawing a Hyperbola that Opens Horizontally”, (Y –...
  • Page 332: Drawing A General Conics

    4-3-8 Drawing a Conics Graph Drawing a General Conics Using the conics general equation A + F = 0, you can draw a parabola or hyperbola whose principal axis is not parallel either to the -axis or the -axis, a slanted ellipse, etc.
  • Page 333: Using Trace To Read Graph Coordinates

    4-4-1 Using Trace to Read Graph Coordinates 4-4 Using Trace to Read Graph Coordinates Trace allows you move a pointer along a graph line and display the coordinates at the current pointer location. Starting the trace operation causes a crosshair pointer ( ) to appear on the graph. You can then press the cursor key or tap the graph controller arrows to move the pointer to the location you want, and read the coordinates that appear on the display.
  • Page 334: Using G-Solve To Analyze A Conics Graph

    4-5-1 Using G-Solve to Analyze a Conics Graph 4-5 Using G-Solve to Analyze a Conics Graph The G-Solve menu includes commands that let you perform a variety of different analytical processes on a graph drawn on the Conics Graph window. Displaying the G-Solve Menu While there is a graph on the Conics Graph window, tap [Analysis] and then [G-Solve].
  • Page 335: Using G-Solve Menu Commands

    4-5-2 Using G-Solve to Analyze a Conics Graph Using G-Solve Menu Commands The following are some examples of how to perform the Conics application [G-Solve] menu commands. u To determine the focus of the parabola x = 2( – 1) –...
  • Page 336 4-5-3 Using G-Solve to Analyze a Conics Graph u To determine the directrix of the parabola x = 2( – 1) – 2 [Analysis] - [G-Solve] - [Directrix] u To determine the axis of symmetry of the parabola x = 2( –...
  • Page 337 4-5-4 Using G-Solve to Analyze a Conics Graph – 1) – 2) u To determine the asymptotes of the hyperbola – [Analysis] - [G-Solve] - [Asymptotes] – 1) – 2) u To determine the eccentricity of the ellipse [Analysis] - [G-Solve] - [Eccentricity] -intercept of the parabola x u To determine the = 2(...
  • Page 338 4-5-5 Using G-Solve to Analyze a Conics Graph – 1) – 2) u For the hyperbola , determine the -coordinate when the – -coordinate is 0 [Analysis] - [G-Solve] - [ -Cal] Tap [OK]. • When there are two -coordinates, press the left and right cursor keys or tap the left and right graph controller arrows to toggle the display between them.
  • Page 339: Chapter 5 Using The 3D Graph Application

    Chapter Using the 3D Graph Application The 3D Graph application lets you draw a 3-dimensional graph of an equation in the form ) or of a parametric equation. 3D Graph Application Overview Inputting an Expression Drawing a 3D Graph Manipulating a Graph on the 3D Graph Window Other 3D Graph Application Functions 20060301...
  • Page 340: Graph Application Overview

    5-1-1 3D Graph Application Overview 5-1 3D Graph Application Overview This section describes the configuration of the 3D Graph application window, and provides basic information about its menus and commands. Starting Up the 3D Graph Application Use the following procedure to start up the 3D Graph application. u ClassPad Operation On the application menu, tap D.
  • Page 341: Graph Application Menus And Buttons

    5-1-2 3D Graph Application Overview 3D Graph Application Menus and Buttons This section explains the operations you can perform using the menus and buttons of the 3D Graph application’s windows. • For information about the O menu, see “Using the O Menu” on page 1-5-4. k 3D Graph Editor Window Menus and Buttons The following describes the menu and button operations you can perform while the 3D Graph Editor window is active.
  • Page 342 5-1-3 3D Graph Application Overview k 3D Graph Window Menus and Buttons The following describes the menu and button operations you can perform while the 3D Graph window is active. Tap this Or select this To do this: button: menu item: Zoom - Zoom In Enlarge the displayed graph Zoom - Zoom Out...
  • Page 343: Graph Application Status Bar

    5-1-4 3D Graph Application Overview 3D Graph Application Status Bar The status bar at the bottom of the 3D Graph application shows the current angle unit setting and [Complex Format] setting (page 1-9-5). Angle unit Real mode If you see this: It means this: The angle unit setting is radians.
  • Page 344: Inputting An Expression

    5-2-1 Inputting an Expression 5-2 Inputting an Expression Use the 3D Graph Editor window to input 3D Graph application expressions. Using 3D Graph Editor Sheets The 3D Graph Editor has five tabbed sheets named Sheet 1 through Sheet 5. Each sheet can contain up to 20 functions.
  • Page 345: Storing A Function

    5-2-2 Inputting an Expression Storing a Function You can input an equation of the form ) or a parametric equation. Parametric Equation Example: To store in line u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap D. • This starts up the 3D Graph application and displays the initial screen of the active 3D Graph Editor window.
  • Page 346: Drawing A 3D Graph

    5-3-1 Drawing a 3D Graph 5-3 Drawing a 3D Graph This section explains how to draw a 3D graph, as well as how to change the angle of a graph and how to rotate a graph. Configuring 3D Graph View Window Parameters Use the 3D Graph View Window to specify maximum and minimum values for the -axis, -axis,...
  • Page 347 5-3-2 Drawing a 3D Graph • The following are the allowable ranges for the indicated View Window parameters: θ θ φ < 180; angle xgrid and ygrid: 2 to 50; angle : – 180 < : 0 to 360. θ φ...
  • Page 348: Graph Example

    5-3-3 Drawing a 3D Graph 3D Graph Example Example 1: To graph the hyperbolic paraboloid /2 – u ClassPad Operation (1) In the 3D Graph application, make the 3D Graph Editor window active. (2) Tap 7 to display the View Window dialog box, and then configure the parameters shown below.
  • Page 349 5-3-4 Drawing a 3D Graph Example 2: To graph a parametric equation u ClassPad Operation (1) In the 3D Graph application, make the 3D Graph Editor window active. (2) Tap to specify input of a parametric equation. (3) Tap line Xst1, and then input sin( t ) × cos( s ). k 9Tst)*cs) (4) Press E.
  • Page 350 5-3-5 Drawing a 3D Graph k Selecting the Function to be Graphed The 3D Graph application lets you graph only one function at a time. When you have more than one expression input on the 3D Graph Editor window, you need to select the one you want to graph.
  • Page 351: Manipulating A Graph On The 3D Graph Window

    5-4-1 Manipulating a Graph on the 3D Graph Window 5-4 Manipulating a Graph on the 3D Graph Window This section describes how to enlarge and reduce the size of a graph, how to change the eye position to view the graph along a particular axis, and how to perform other operations like automatic rotation.
  • Page 352: Rotating The Graph Manually

    5-4-2 Manipulating a Graph on the 3D Graph Window • To view the graph facing the -axis, tap [Zoom] and then ], or press the y key. [View- • To view the graph facing the -axis, tap [Zoom] and then ], or press the Z key.
  • Page 353: Rotating A Graph Automatically

    5-4-3 Manipulating a Graph on the 3D Graph Window Rotating a Graph Automatically You can use the following procedure to rotate a graph automatically for about 30 seconds. u ClassPad Operation (1) To start automatic graph rotation, tap a and then [Rotating]. (2) On the submenu that appears, select the rotation direction you want: [Left →...
  • Page 354: Other 3D Graph Application Functions

    5-5-1 Other 3D Graph Application Functions 5-5 Other 3D Graph Application Functions Using Trace to Read Graph Coordinates Starting the trace operation causes a crosshair pointer to appear on the graph. You can then press a cursor key or tap the graph controller arrows to move the pointer to the location you want, and read the coordinates that appear on the display.
  • Page 355: Calculating A -Value For Particular

    5-5-2 Other 3D Graph Application Functions Calculating a -value for Particular - and -values, or - and -values Use the following procedure to calculate a -value for given - and -values on the displayed graph. u ClassPad Operation (1) Draw the graph and make the 3D Graph window active. (2) Tap [Analysis], and then [ -Cal].
  • Page 356: Using Drag And Drop To Down A 3D Graph

    5-5-3 Other 3D Graph Application Functions Using Drag and Drop to Draw a 3D Graph Dropping an equation of the form ) into the 3D Graph window will graph the equation. 20060301...
  • Page 357: Chapter 6 Using The Sequence Application

    Chapter Using the Sequence Application The Sequence application provides you with the tools you need to work with explicit sequences and recursive type sequences. Sequence Application Overview Inputting an Expression in the Sequence Application Recursive and Explicit Form of a Sequence Using LinkTrace Drawing a Cobweb Diagram 20060301...
  • Page 358: Sequence Application Overview

    6-1-1 Sequence Application Overview 6-1 Sequence Application Overview This section describes the configuration of the Sequence application window, and provides basic information about its menus and commands. Starting up the Sequence Application Use the following procedure to start up the Sequence application. u ClassPad Operation On the application menu, tap H.
  • Page 359: Sequence Application Menus And Buttons

    6-1-2 Sequence Application Overview Sequence Application Menus and Buttons This section explains the operations you can perform using the menus and buttons of the Sequence application’s windows. • For information about Format related items on O menu, see “Application Format Settings” on page 1-9-4.
  • Page 360 6-1-3 Sequence Application Overview Menu To do this: Select this menu item: Input a recursion expression term when n, a Type is selected on the [Recursive] sheet Input a recursion expression term when n, a Type is selected on the [Recursive] sheet Input a recursion expression term when the E , or [Explicit] tab is selected...
  • Page 361 6-1-4 Sequence Application Overview k Sequence Table Window Menus and Buttons Edit Menu The commands on the sequence Table window [Edit] menu are identical to those for the Sequence Editor window [Edit] menu described on page 6-1-2. Graph Menu To do this: Tap this button: Or select this Graph menu item: G-Connect...
  • Page 362 6-1-5 Sequence Application Overview Buttons To do this: Tap this button: Create a sequence table Display the Sequence Editor window & Display the View Window dialog box Display the Sequence Table Input dialog box Display the Sequence RUN window k Sequence RUN Window Menus and Buttons Edit Menu The commands on the Sequence RUN window [Edit] menu are identical to those for the Sequence Editor window [Edit] menu described on page 6-1-2.
  • Page 363: Sequence Application Status Bar

    6-1-6 Sequence Application Overview Sequence Application Status Bar The status bar at the bottom of the Sequence application shows the current angle unit setting and [Complex Format] setting (page 1-9-5). Angle unit Real mode If you see this: It means this: The angle unit setting is radians.
  • Page 364: Inputting An Expression In The Sequence Application

    6-2-1 Inputting an Expression in the Sequence Application 6-2 Inputting an Expression in the Sequence Application In the Sequence application, you input expressions using menus and buttons, without using the soft keyboard at the bottom of the window. Inputting Data on the Sequence Editor Window To input an expression, tap the input location you want ((a), (b), or (c)) to locate the cursor there.
  • Page 365: Recursive And Explicit Form Of A Sequence

    6-3-1 Recursive and Explicit Form of a Sequence 6-3 Recursive and Explicit Form of a Sequence ClassPad supports use of three types of sequence expressions: Generating a Number Table In addition to ordered pair tables, the Sequence application provides you with the means to generate arithmetic sequence tables , geometric sequence tables , progression of...
  • Page 366 6-3-2 Recursive and Explicit Form of a Sequence (8) Tap the down arrow button next to # , and then select ` to create the table. 3 = 2 + 1 In the above example, “4 Cells” is selected for the [Cell Width Pattern] setting of the Graph Format dialog box (page 1-9-7).
  • Page 367: Graphing A Recursion

    6-3-3 Recursive and Explicit Form of a Sequence 5 = 8 – 3 ÷ 3 = 18 ÷ 2 = 20 Progression of Difference Geometric Sequence Table Table Graphing a Recursion An expression can be graphed as a connect type graph (G-Connect) or a plot type graph (G-Plot).
  • Page 368 6-3-4 Recursive and Explicit Form of a Sequence (7) Configure View Window settings as shown below. xmin = 0 xmax = 6 xscale = 1 xdot: (Specify auto setting.) ymin = –15 ymax = 65 yscale = 5 ydot: (Specify auto setting.) (8) After everything is the way you want, tap [OK].
  • Page 369: Determining The General Term Of A Recursion Expression

    6-3-5 Recursive and Explicit Form of a Sequence Determining the General Term of a Recursion Expression The following procedure converts the sequence expressed by a recursion expression to the general term format Example: To determine the general term of the recursion expression + 2, u ClassPad Operation (1) Start up the Sequence Editor.
  • Page 370: Calculating The Sum Of A Sequence

    6-3-6 Recursive and Explicit Form of a Sequence Example: To obtain the -th terms of a system of recursion formulas with the initial conditions Calculating the Sum of a Sequence Perform the following steps when you want to determine the sum of a specific range of the sequence of a recursion expression or a general term expression.
  • Page 371: Using Linktrace

    6-4-1 Using LinkTrace 6-4 Using LinkTrace While the Table and Graph windows are on the display, you can activate LinkTrace. To do this, tap in the Table window to make it active. Next, tap a and then [Link]. While LinkTrace is active, the pointer on the Graph window jumps automatically to the point indicated by the coordinates in the currently selected table cell.
  • Page 372: Drawing A Cobweb Diagram

    6-5-1 Drawing a Cobweb Diagram 6-5 Drawing a Cobweb Diagram You can use the procedure described here to input a sequence and draw a cobweb diagram. Example: To graph – 1 = 0.5 u ClassPad Operation (1) Start up the Sequence Editor. •...
  • Page 373: Chapter 7 Using The Statistics Application

    Chapter Using the Statistics Application This chapter explains how to use the Statistics application. You can use the Statistics application to perform a variety of statistical calculations and to graph statistical data. Numeric data stored in lists can be used to perform Statistics application operations. This chapter also includes information about performing statistical tests, and calculating confidence intervals and distributions.
  • Page 374: Statistics Application Overview

    7-1-1 Statistics Application Overview 7-1 Statistics Application Overview This section describes the configuration of the Statistics application windows and provides basic information about its menus and commands. The Statistics application provides you with the tools you need to perform the operations listed below.
  • Page 375: Starting Up The Statistics Application

    7-1-2 Statistics Application Overview Starting Up the Statistics Application Use the following procedure to start up the Statistics application. u ClassPad Operation On the application menu, tap I. This starts the Statistics application and displays the Stat Editor window. List name cell Cell (variable name) Line number...
  • Page 376: Stat Editor Window Menus And Buttons

    7-1-3 Statistics Application Overview Stat Editor Window Menus and Buttons This section explains the operations you can perform using the menus and buttons of the Statistical application’s Stat Editor window. Tap this Or select this To do this: button: menu item: —...
  • Page 377: Stat Editor Window Status Bar

    7-1-4 Statistics Application Overview Stat Editor Window Status Bar The status bar at the bottom of the Stat Editor window shows the current angle unit setting (page 1-9-5), statistics View Window setting (page 7-3-2), and decimal calculation setting (page 1-9-5). If you see this: It means this: The angle unit setting is radians.
  • Page 378: Using Stat Editor

    7-2-1 Using Stat Editor 7-2 Using Stat Editor Lists play a very important role in ClassPad statistical calculations. This section provides an overview of list operations and terminology. It also explains how to use the Stat Editor, a tool for creating and maintaining lists. Basic List Operations This section provides the basics of list operations, including how to start up the Statistics application, how to open a list, and how to close a list.
  • Page 379: Creating A List

    7-2-2 Using Stat Editor k Creating a List A list starts out with an initial default name like list1, list2, list3, etc. The Stat Editor allows you to generate list data (list variables) quickly and easily. Note • The Stat Editor window has six default list variables, named “list1” through “list6”. These lists are system variables that are defined by the system.
  • Page 380 7-2-3 Using Stat Editor u To jump to the first or last line of a list (1) Select any cell in the list. (2) On the menu bar, tap [Edit]. (3) Select one of the following commands to perform the type of operation you want. To do this: Select this command: Move the cursor to line 1 of the list...
  • Page 381: Inputting Data Into A List

    7-2-4 Using Stat Editor k Closing a List Closing a list saves it under its current list (variable) name. There are two different methods you can use to close a list: using the [Close List] command, and clearing the list name from its list name cell. u To close a list using the “Close List”...
  • Page 382 7-2-5 Using Stat Editor (2) Input the data you want. To input a value • Use the input keypad or soft keyboard that appears when you press k. You can also access the soft keyboard by tapping O Menu. To input a mathematical expression •...
  • Page 383 7-2-6 Using Stat Editor u To batch input a set of data Example: To input the values 1, 2, and 3 into list1 (1) On the Stat Editor window, select the “Cal” cell of the list where you want to input the data (list1 in this example).
  • Page 384: Editing List Contents

    7-2-7 Using Stat Editor Editing List Contents Use the procedures in this section to delete and insert elements, to clear data, and to sort data. u To delete a list cell (1) On the Stat Editor window, select the cell you want to delete. (2) Tap [Edit].
  • Page 385: Sorting List Data

    7-2-8 Using Stat Editor • Note that inserting a cell does not affect the cells in other lists. If you insert a cell in a list that is aligned with another list, the lists will become misaligned when the cells underneath are shifted downwards.
  • Page 386: Controlling The Number Of Displayed List Columns

    7-2-9 Using Stat Editor Controlling the Number of Displayed List Columns You can use the following procedures to control how many list columns appear on the Statistics application window. You can select 2, 3, or 4 columns. u To specify the number of columns for the list display On the Stat Editor window, tap S (two columns), D (three columns) or F (four columns) to specify the width.
  • Page 387: Before Trying To Draw A Statistical Graph

    7-3-1 Before Trying to Draw a Statistical Graph 7-3 Before Trying to Draw a Statistical Graph Before drawing a statistical graph, you need to first configure its “StatGraph setup” using the [SetGraph] menu. The StatGraph setup allows you to configure parameters to control the graph type, the lists that contain a graph’s data, the type of plot markers to be used, and other settings.
  • Page 388: Configuring Statgraph Setups

    7-3-2 Before Trying to Draw a Statistical Graph When you want to do this: Do this: Turn off graphing of the last regression Clear the check box next to [Previous Reg]. calculation results Have Statistics View Window settings Tap [Stat Window Auto] and then select configured automatically [On].
  • Page 389 7-3-3 Before Trying to Draw a Statistical Graph u Draw To do this: Select this option: Draw the graph using the StatGraph setup of the current tab Not draw the graph using the StatGraph setup of the current tab u Type Tap the down arrow button, and then select the graph type from the list that appears.
  • Page 390 7-3-4 Before Trying to Draw a Statistical Graph u Freq Tap the down arrow button, and then select the frequency setting from the list that appears. To do this: Select this option: Plot each data value once list1 — list6 Specify a list whose values indicate the frequency of each (or a list name you data value...
  • Page 391: Graphing Single-Variable Statistical Data

    7-4-1 Graphing Single-Variable Statistical Data 7-4 Graphing Single-Variable Statistical Data Single-variable data is data that consists of a single value. If you are trying to obtain the average height of the members of a single class, for example, the single variable would be height.
  • Page 392: Histogram Bar Graph (Histogram)

    7-4-2 Graphing Single-Variable Statistical Data Histogram Bar Graph (Histogram) A histogram shows the frequency (frequency distribution) of each data class as a rectangular bar. Classes are on the horizontal axis, while frequency is on the vertical axis. k Graph Parameter Settings (page 7-3-3, 7-3-4) •...
  • Page 393: Normal Distribution Curve (Ndist)

    7-4-3 Graphing Single-Variable Statistical Data k Graph Parameter Settings (page 7-3-3, 7-3-4) • [XList] specifies the list that contains the data to be plotted. • [Freq] specifies the frequency of the data. • If [Show Outliers] box is checked, “outlier” square symbols are shown instead of “whisker” lines where a data value is relatively large or small compared to the other data values.
  • Page 394: Broken Line Graph (Broken)

    7-4-4 Graphing Single-Variable Statistical Data Broken Line Graph (Broken) In the broken line graph, lines connect the pointers that fall at the center of each histogram bar. k Graph Parameter Settings (page 7-3-3, 7-3-4) • [XList] specifies the list that contains the data to be graphed. •...
  • Page 395: Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data

    7-5-1 Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data 7-5 Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data With paired-variable statistical data there are two values for each data item. An example of paired-variable statistical data would be the change in size of an iron bar as its temperature changes. One variable would be temperature, and the other variable is the corresponding bar size.
  • Page 396: Drawing A Regression Graph

    7-5-2 Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data (9) Tap y to draw the line graph. Scatter diagram line graph Drawing a Regression Graph Use the procedures below to input paired-variable statistical data. Next perform regression using the data and then graph the results. Note that you can draw a regression graph without performing the regression calculation.
  • Page 397 7-5-3 Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data (6) Tap [Calc] [Logarithmic Reg]. (7) Tap [OK]. (8) Tap [OK] " . • You can perform trace (page 3-7-1) on a regression graph. Trace scroll, however, is not supported when a scatter diagram is displayed. 20060301...
  • Page 398: Graphing Previously Calculated Regression Results

    7-5-4 Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data Example 2: Input the paired-variable data shown below (which is the same data as Example 1), and then draw the regression graph without performing regression calculation. list1 = 0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2 list2 = –2.1, 0.3, 1.5, 2.0, 2.4 u ClassPad Operation (1) m I (2) Input the data shown above.
  • Page 399: Drawing A Linear Regression Graph

    7-5-5 Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data Drawing a Linear Regression Graph Linear regression uses the method of least squares to determine the equation that best fits your data points, and returns values for the slope and -intercept. The graphic representation of this relationship is a linear regression graph. u ClassPad Operation Start the graphing operation from the Statistics application’s Graph window or List window.
  • Page 400: Drawing A Med-Med Graph

    7-5-6 Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data Drawing a Med-Med Graph When you suspect that the data contains extreme values, you should use the Med-Med graph (which is based on medians) in place of the linear regression graph. Med-Med graph is similar to the linear regression graph, but it also minimizes the effects of extreme values. u ClassPad Operation Start the graphing operation from the Statistics application’s Graph window or List window.
  • Page 401: Drawing Quadratic, Cubic, And Quartic Regression Graphs

    7-5-7 Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data Drawing Quadratic, Cubic, and Quartic Regression Graphs You can draw a quadratic, cubic, or quartic regression graph based on the plotted points. These graphs use the method of least squares to draw a curve that passes the vicinity of as many data points as possible. These graphs can be expressed as quadratic, cubic, and quartic regression expressions.
  • Page 402 7-5-8 Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data Cubic Regression Model Formula: · · · cubic regression coefficient quadratic regression coefficient linear regression coefficient regression constant term ( -intercept) coefficient of determination MSe : mean square error • MSe = + b·x + c·x Σ...
  • Page 403: Drawing A Logarithmic Regression Graph

    7-5-9 Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data Drawing a Logarithmic Regression Graph Logarithmic regression expresses as a logarithmic function of . The normal logarithmic regression formula is · ln( ). If we say that X = ln( ), then this formula corresponds to the linear regression formula ·X.
  • Page 404 7-5-10 Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data · Drawing an Exponential Regression Graph ( · Exponential regression can be used when is proportional to the exponential function of · . The normal exponential regression formula is · . If we obtain the logarithms of both sides, we get ln( ) = ln( ·...
  • Page 405: A B X

    7-5-11 Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data y Drawing an Exponential Regression Graph ( · Exponential regression can be used when is proportional to the exponential function of . The normal exponential regression formula in this case is · . If we take the natural logarithms of both sides, we get ln( ) = ln( ) + (ln( )) ·...
  • Page 406 7-5-12 Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data Drawing a Power Regression Graph ( · Power regression can be used when is proportional to the power of . The normal power regression formula is · . If we obtain the logarithms of both sides, we get ln( ) = ln( ·...
  • Page 407: C ) + D )

    7-5-13 Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data Drawing a Sinusoidal Regression Graph ( ·sin( · ) + Sinusoidal regression is best for data that repeats at a regular fixed interval over time. u ClassPad Operation Start the graphing operation from the Statistics application’s Graph window or List window. From the Graph window Tap [Calc] [Sinusoidal Reg] [OK] [OK] "...
  • Page 408 7-5-14 Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data Drawing a Logistic Regression Graph ( ) · · –b Logistic regression is best for data whose values continually increase over time, until a saturation point is reached. u ClassPad Operation Start the graphing operation from the Statistics application’s Graph window or List window. From the Graph window Tap [Calc] [Logistic Reg] [OK] [OK] "...
  • Page 409: Overlaying A Function Graph On A Statistical Graph

    7-5-15 Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data Overlaying a Function Graph on a Statistical Graph You can overlay an existing statistical graph with any type of function graph. Example: Input the two sets of data shown below, and plot the data on a scatter plot. Next, overlay the scatter plot with the graph of = 2 ·...
  • Page 410: Using The Statistical Graph Window Toolbar

    7-6-1 Using the Statistical Graph Window Toolbar 7-6 Using the Statistical Graph Window Toolbar The following describes the operations you can perform using the toolbar on the Statistical Graph window. To do this: Tap this button: Display the Stat Editor window Display the Graph Editor window Redraw the displayed graph "...
  • Page 411: Performing Statistical Calculations

    7-7-1 Performing Statistical Calculations 7-7 Performing Statistical Calculations You can perform statistical calculations without drawing a graph by tapping [Calc] on the menu bar and selecting [One-Variable] or [Two-Variable]. Viewing Single-variable Statistical Calculation Results Besides using a graph, you can also use the following procedure to view the single-variable statistics parameter values.
  • Page 412: Viewing Paired-Variable Statistical Calculation Results

    7-7-2 Performing Statistical Calculations Viewing Paired-variable Statistical Calculation Results Besides using a graph, you can also use the following procedure to view the paired-variable statistics parameter values. u To display paired-variable calculation results (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Two-Variable]. (2) On the dialog box that appears, specify the [XList] name and [YList] name, and select the [Freq] setting (page 7-3-3, 7-3-4).
  • Page 413: Viewing Regression Calculation Results

    7-7-3 Performing Statistical Calculations Viewing Regression Calculation Results To view regression calculation results, tap [Calc] on the menu bar and then tap the type of calculation results you want. To view these calculation results: Tap this option: Linear regression Linear Reg Med-Med MedMed Line Quadratic regression Quadratic Reg Cubic regression...
  • Page 414: Copying A Regression Formula To The Graph & Table Application

    7-7-4 Performing Statistical Calculations u To view “residual” system variable values (1) Tap here. (2) Tap here, and enter “residual”. • To input lower-case alpha characters, tap the soft keyboard’s 0 tab. (3) Tap w . Copying a Regression Formula to the Graph & Table Application You can use the following procedure to copy the calculated result of a regression formula to the Graph &...
  • Page 415: Test, Confidence Interval, And Distribution Calculations

    7-8-1 Test, Confidence Interval, and Distribution Calculations 7-8 Test, Confidence Interval, and Distribution Calculations You can use a wizard to perform test, confidence interval and distribution calculations in the Statistics application or write a program in the Program application. In the Statistics application, you can perform the calculations using the wizard that you launch by tapping [Calc] on the menu bar.
  • Page 416 7-8-2 Test, Confidence Interval, and Distribution Calculations k Example 1: 1-Sample Test μ condition : ≠ μ σ : 3 o : 24.5 n : 48 u ClassPad Operation (1) m p (2) Tap O . (3) On the New File dialog box that appears, configure the settings as described below. Type: Program(Normal) Folder: Select the name of the folder where you want to save the program you are creating.
  • Page 417 7-8-3 Test, Confidence Interval, and Distribution Calculations k Example 2: Two-Way ANOVA The values in the table below are measurement results that show how the durability of a metal product is affected by changes in heat treatment time (A) and temperature (B). Experiments were conducted twice under each condition. Temperature B1 Temperature B2 Time A1...
  • Page 418 7-8-4 Test, Confidence Interval, and Distribution Calculations (10) Tap p . The above results indicate that altering the time is not significant, altering the temperature is significant, and interaction between time and temperature is highly significant. 20060301...
  • Page 419: Tests

    7-9-1 Tests 7-9 Tests The following is a list of tests, and a description of what each one tests for. Test Name Description Test Test provides a variety of different tests based on standard deviation based tests. They make it possible to test whether or not a sample accurately represents the population when the standard deviation of a population (such as the entire population of a country) is known from previous tests.
  • Page 420: Test Command List

    7-9-2 Tests Test Name Description ANOVA Tests the hypothesis that the population means of multiple populations are equal. One-Way ANOVA Tests the ratio between the variation in sample means of several populations compared to variation among the units within the individual samples in a single factor experiment.
  • Page 421 7-9-3 Tests Calculation Result Output μ ≠ 0 : test condition value �value sample mean σ : sample standard deviation (Displayed only for list format.) –1 sample size Example Mean : 131 Sample size : 10 Population standard deviation : 19 Assumed population mean : 120 •...
  • Page 422 7-9-4 Tests 2-Sample Test Menu: �Test���Two�Sample ZTest� �Test���Two�Sample ZTest� Description: Tests a hypothesis relative to the population mean of two populations when the standard deviations of the two populations are known. A 2�Sample Test is used for normal distributions. : sample mean of sample 1 data —...
  • Page 423 7-9-5 Tests Example Sample A Sample B Size Standard deviation 23.16 18.51 Mean 65.43 71.87 • Statistics Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Test]. (2) Select [Two-Sample ZTest] and [Variable], and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Select the μ condition [≠] and input values.
  • Page 424 7-9-6 Tests Definition of Terms Prop condition : sample proportion test condition (“≠” specifies two-tail test, “<” specifies lower one-tail test, “>” specifies upper one-tail test.) expected sample proportion (0 < < 1) sample value (integer, > 0) sample size (positive integer) Calculation Result Output Prop≠0.5 : test condition value...
  • Page 425 7-9-7 Tests Definition of Terms condition : sample proportion test conditions (“≠” specifies two-tail test, “<” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is smaller than sample 2, “>” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is greater than sample 2.) data value (integer, >...
  • Page 426 7-9-8 Tests Test 1-Sample Test Menu: ������������������ ������ ������������������ ������ Description: ����� � hy�o�h��i� r����iv� �o � �o�u���io� ���� wh�� �o�u���io� ����d�rd d�vi��io� i� u�k�ow�. A 1������� ���� i� u��d for di��ribu�io�. o — : ������ ���� μ n —1 : ���u��d �o�u���io� ���� σ : ������ ����d�rd d�vi��io� −1 : ������ �iz� Definition of Terms μ co�di�io� : �o�u���io� ���� v��u� ���� co�di�io�� (“≠” ���cifi�� �wo���i� ����, “<” ���cifi�� �ow�r o�����i� ����, “>” ���cifi�� u���r o�����i� ����.) μ ���u��d �o�u���io� ���� Li�� : d��� �i�� Fr�q : fr�qu��cy (1 or �i�� ����) ������ ���� σ σ ������ ����d�rd d�vi��io� ( > 0) −1 −1 ������ �iz� (�o�i�iv� i���g�r)
  • Page 427 7-9-9 Tests (7) To display the graph, tap $ . Example 2 (calculation with parameter) Standard deviation : 80.6 Mean : 295.6 Sample size : 9 Assumed population mean : 250 • Statistics Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Test]. (2) Select [One-Sample TTest] and [Variable], and then tap [Next >>].
  • Page 428 7-9-10 Tests 2-Sample Test Menu: ������������������ ������ ������������������ ������ Description: �hi� c����nd c����r�� �h� ���u���i�n ���n� �f ��� ���u���i�n� �h�n ���u���i�n ���nd�rd d�vi��i�n i� unkn��n. A 2������� ���� i� u��d f�r di��ribu�i�n. — o : ������ ���n �f ������ 1 d��� : ������ ���n �f ������ 2 d��� σ : ������ ���nd�rd d�vi��i�n �f ������ 1 — — — — −1 σ : ������ ���nd�rd d�vi��i�n �f ������ 2 −1 : �iz� �f ������ 1 : �iz� �f ������ 2 �hi� f�r�u�� i� ����ic�b�� �h�n �h� ���u���i�n ���nd�rd d�vi��i�n� �f �h� ��� ���u���i�n� �r� n�� �qu��. �h� d�n��in���r i� diff�r�n� �h�n �h� ���u���i�n ���nd�rd d�vi��i�n� �r� �qu��. σ �h� di��ribu�i�n d�gr��� �f fr��d�� �nd diff�r �cc�rding �� �h��h�r −1 �h� ���u���i�n ���nd�rd d�vi��i�n� �f �h� ��� ���u���i�n� �r� �qu��.
  • Page 429 7-9-11 Tests Calculation Result Output μ ≠ μ ���� c�ndi�i�n v��u� �v��u� d�gr��� �f fr��d�� ������ ���n �f ������ 1 d��� ������ ���n �f ������ 2 d��� σ ������ ���nd�rd d�vi��i�n �f ������ 1 –1 σ ������ ���nd�rd d�vi��i�n �f ������ 2 –1 σ P����d ������ ���nd�rd d�vi��i�n (Di����y�d �n�y �h�n ����ing i� –1 �urn�d �n.) �iz� �f ������ 1 �iz� �f ������ 2 Example �i��1 : {−8522, 316, −9001, 6470, 8956, 4348, 8571, 2142, −7139, 9925, 1260} �i��2 : {176, 5498, 4830, 9457, 6486, 9607, −8334, −1771, 7919, −2997} • Statistics Wizard Operation (1) In�u� �h� d��� in�� ��i��1� �nd ��i��2� in �h� ���� Edi��r. (2) On �h� ��nu b�r, ��� �C��c� �nd �h�n ������. (3) ����c� ����������� ������ �nd �Li���, �nd �h�n ��� �N�x� >>�. (4) ����c� �h� μ c�ndi�i�n �<�.
  • Page 430 7-9-12 Tests Input Example: Syntax 1 (list format) TwoSampleTTest “<”,list1,list2,1,1,Off Syntax 2 (parameter format) TwoSampleTTest “≠”,107.5,0.78,10,97.5,0.65,12,Off Linear Regression Test Menu: [Test]-[Linear Reg TTest] Description: This command treats two groups of data as paired variables ( ). The method of least squares is used to determine the most appropriate pair for the coefficients of the regression formula .
  • Page 431 7-9-13 Tests Example list1 : { 38, 56, 59, 64, 74 } list2 : { 41, 63, 70, 72, 84 } • Statistics Wizard Operation (1) Input the data into [list1] and [list2] in the Stat Editor. (2) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Test]. (3) Select [Linear Reg TTest] and then tap [Next >>]. (4) Select the β & ρ condition [ ≠ ]. (5) Select XList [list1], YList [list2] and Freq [1]. (6) Tap [Next >>]. (7) To display the graph, tap $ . u Program, eActivity or Main Application Command: LinRegTTest  Command Syntax “ β & ρ condition”, XList, YList, Freq (or 1) * “Freq” can be omitted. Doing so sets “1” for “Freq”. Input Example LinRegTTest “≠”,list1,list2,1 χ...
  • Page 432 7-9-14 Tests Calculation Result Output χ : χ value -value : degrees of freedom Example 11 68 3 23 5 • Statistics Wizard Operation (1) J (2) Input the matrix and assign it to variable a . (3) m I (4) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Test]. (5) Select [χ...
  • Page 433 7-9-15 Tests Definition of Terms σ condition: population standard deviation test conditions (“≠” specifies two- tail test, “<” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is smaller than sample 2, “>” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is greater than sample 2.) List(1) : list where sample 1 data is located List(2) :...
  • Page 434 7-9-16 Tests Input Example Syntax 1 (list format) TwoSampleFTest “≠”,list1,list2,1,1 Syntax 2 (parameter format) TwoSampleFTest “≠”,1.94,10,2.12,15 k ANOVA One-Way ANOVA Menu: [Test]-[One-Way ANOVA ] Description: This command tests the hypothesis that the population means of multiple populations are equal. It compares the mean of one or more groups based on one independent variable or factor.
  • Page 435 7-9-17 Tests u Program, eActivity or Main Application Command: OneWayANOVA Command Syntax FactorList(A), DependentList Input Example list1:{1,1,1,1,1,2,2,2,2,2,3,3,3,3,3} list2:{7,4,6,6,5,6,5,5,8,7,4,7,6,7,6} OneWayANOVA list1,list2 Two-Way ANOVA Menu: [Test]-[Two-Way ANOVA ] Description: This command tests the hypothesis that the population means of multiple populations are equal. It examines the effect of each variable independently as well as their interaction with each other based on a dependent variable.
  • Page 436 7-9-18 Tests Example Factor B1 Factor B2 Factor A1 14.5, 11, 10.8, 14.3, 10 (list1) 16.5, 18.4, 12.7, 14, 12.8 (list2) Factor A2 21, 18.5, 15.2, 17.9, 21.6 (list3) 43.2, 35.2, 28.7, 41.3, 47.1 (list4) • Statistics Wizard Operation (1) Input the data into [list1] through [list4] in the Stat Editor.
  • Page 437: Confidence Intervals

    7-10-1 Confidence Intervals 7-10 Confidence Intervals A confidence interval is a range of values that has a specified probability of containing the parameter being estimated. A confidence interval that is too broad makes it difficult to get an idea of where the parameter (actual value) is located.
  • Page 438: Confidence Interval Command List

    7-10-2 Confidence Intervals Confidence Interval Command List Confidence Interval 1-Sample Interval Menu: ���������������������� ����� ���������������������� ����� ���������� ����� ������� ����� ������ ����� ����� ����� � Description: This co����d ob��i�s �h� co�fid��c� i������� fo� �h� �o�u���io� ���� wh�� �h� �o�u���io� s���d��d d��i��io� is k�ow�. Th� co�fid��c� i������� is ob��i��d usi�g �h� fo��owi�g �x���ssio�s. σ Left = o – Z α Right = o + Z α σ...
  • Page 439 7-10-3 Confidence Intervals Example 2 (c��cu���io� wi�h ���������) M��� : 300 ������ siz� : 6 Po�u���io� s���d��d d��i��io� : 3 �ig�ific��c� ����� : 5% ( = co�fid��c� ����� : 95%) • Statistics Wizard Operation (1) �� �h� ���u b��, ��� �C��c� ��d �h�� ����������. (2) ����c� ����������� ����� ��d �V��i�b���, ��d �h�� ��� �N�x� >>�. (3) ���u� ���u�s. (4) T�� �N�x� >>�. u Program, eActivity or Main Application Command: �������������  Command Syntax Syntax 1 (list format) C�L���� ���u�, σ ���u�, Lis�, F��q (o� 1) * “F��q” c�� b� o�i���d. Doi�g so s��s “1” fo� “F��q”. Syntax 2 (parameter format) C�L���� ���u�, σ...
  • Page 440 7-10-4 Confidence Intervals Definition of Terms C�L���� : co�fid��c� ����� (0 < C�L���� < 1) σ �o�u���io� s���d��d d��i��io� of s����� 1 ( σ > 0) σ �o�u���io� s���d��d d��i��io� of s����� 2 ( σ > 0) Lis�(1) : �is� wh��� s����� 1 d��� is �oc���d Lis�(2) : �is� wh��� s����� 2 d��� is �oc���d F��q(1) : f��qu��cy of s����� 1 (1 o� �is� ����) F��q(2) : f��qu��cy of s����� 2 (1 o� �is� ����) s����� ���� of s����� 1 d��� siz� of s����� 1 (�osi�i�� i���g��) s����� ���� of s����� 2 d��� siz� of s����� 2 (�osi�i�� i���g��) Calculation Result Output L�f� : i������� �ow�� �i�i� (��f� �dg�) Righ� : i������� u���� �i�i� (�igh� �dg�) s����� ���� of s����� 1 d��� s����� ���� of s����� 2 d��� σ : s����� s���d��d d��i��io� of s����� 1 (Dis���y�d o��y fo� �is� fo����.) −1 σ...
  • Page 441 7-10-5 Confidence Intervals Input Example: Syntax 1 (list format) TwoSampleZInt 0.95,15.5,13.5,list1,list2,1,1 Syntax 2 (parameter format) TwoSampleZInt 0.95,1,1.5,418,40,402,50 1-Prop Interval Menu: [Interval]-[One-Prop ZInt] Description: This command obtains the confidence interval of the proportion of successes in a population. The confidence interval is obtained using the following expressions. The confidence level is 100 (1 – α)%. : sample size –...
  • Page 442 7-10-6 Confidence Intervals u Program, eActivity or Main Application Command: OnePropZ Int Command Syntax C-Level value, value, value Input Example: OnePropZInt 0.99,2048,4040 2-Prop Interval Menu: [Interval]-[Two-Prop ZInt] Description: This command obtains the confidence interval of the difference between the proportions of successes of two populations. The confidence interval is obtained using the following expressions. The confidence level is 100 (1 –...
  • Page 443 7-10-7 Confidence Intervals Example Data1 : 49, sample size : 61 Data2 : 38, sample size : 62 Significance level : 5% ( = confidence level : 95%) • Statistics Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Interval]. (2) Select [Two-Prop ZInt] and then tap [Next >>].
  • Page 444 7-10-8 Confidence Intervals Calculation Result Output Left : interval lower limit (left edge) Right : interval upper limit (right edge) sample mean σ sample standard deviation –1 sample size Example list1 : { 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9 } Significance level : 5% ( = confidence level : 95%) •...
  • Page 445 7-10-9 Confidence Intervals When the two population standard deviations are equal (pooled) α α Left = (o Left = (o – o – o )– t )– t σ σ n–1 n–1 –2 –2 α α Right = (o Right = (o –...
  • Page 446 7-10-10 Confidence Intervals Example list1 : { 12.207, 16.869, 25.05, 22,429, 8.456, 10.589 } list2 : { 11.074, 9.686, 12.064, 9.351, 8.182, 6.642 } Significance level : 5% ( = confidence level : 95%) • Statistics Wizard Operation (1) Input the data into [list1] and [list2] in the Stat Editor. (2) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Interval].
  • Page 447: Distributions

    7-11-1 Distributions 7-11 Distributions Though there are a number of different types of distributions, the one most commonly used is the “Normal Distribution”, which is an essential type of distribution for statistical calculations. Other types of distributions include the Poisson distribution and geometric distribution. The type of distribution used depends on the type of data being handled.
  • Page 448 7-11-2 Distributions Description Distribution Name Binomial Distribution Binomial Distribution Calculates the probability in a binomial distribution that the Probability success will occur on a specified trial. Binomial Cumulative Calculates the cumulative probability in a binomial distribution Distribution that the success will occur on or before a specified trial. Inverse Binomial Calculates the minimum number of trials of a binomial Cumulative Distribution...
  • Page 449: Input Example

    7-11-3 Distributions Distribution Command List k Normal Distribution Normal Probability Density Menu: ����������������������� ��� ����������������������� ��� ������� ��� � Description: Th�� c�����d c���c�����e� �he p����������y de����y �f ������� d����������� f��� � �pec�fied v����e. ������� p����������y de����y �� ��ed f�� ������� d�����������. (x – µ) µ – f (x) = ( σ > 0) σ π σ Definition of Terms : d��� v����e σ...
  • Page 450 7-11-4 Distributions Normal Cumulative Distribution Menu: [Distribution]-[Normal CD] Description: This command calculates the probability of normal distribution data falling between : lower bound (Lower) : upper bound (Upper) Defi nition of Terms Lower : lower bound Upper : upper bound σ...
  • Page 451 7-11-5 Distributions Inverse Normal Cumulative Distribution Menu: [Distribution]-[Inverse Normal CD] Description: This command calculates the cumulative probability in a normal distribution based on lower and upper bounds. Tail:Left Tail:Right Tail:Center Upper bound of Lower bound of Lower and Upper bounds of integration integration integration...
  • Page 452 7-11-6 Distributions Distribution Student- Probability Density Menu: [Distribution]-[Student-T PD] Description: This command calculates probability density from a specified value. df+1 – df + 1 Γ f (x) = π Γ Definition of Terms : data value : degrees of freedom ( > 0) Calculation Result Output prob : Student-...
  • Page 453 7-11-7 Distributions Student- Cumulative Distribution Menu: [Distribution]-[Student-T CD] Description: This command calculates the probability of the Student- distribution data falling between df + 1 Γ df+1 – : lower bound (Lower) : upper bound (Upper) π Γ Defi nition of Terms Lower : lower bound Upper : upper bound degrees of freedom (...
  • Page 454 7-11-8 Distributions Inverse Student-t Cumulative Distribution Menu: [Distribution]-[Inverse T CD] Description: This command calculates the inverse of the t cumulative distribution. ∞ ∞ Lower bound of integration α =? Defi nition of Terms prob : t cumulative probability ( , 0 < <...
  • Page 455 7-11-9 Distributions k χ Distribution χ Probability Density [Distribution]-[ χ Menu: Description: This command calculates the probability density of χ distribution from a specified value. –1 – f (x) = Γ Definition of Terms : data value : degrees of freedom (positive integer) Calculation Result Output prob χ...
  • Page 456 7-11-10 Distributions χ Cumulative Distribution [Distribution]-[ χ Menu: CD ] Description: This command calculates the probability of χ distribution data falling between : lower bound (Lower) –1 – : upper bound (Upper) Γ Defi nition of Terms Lower : lower bound Upper : upper bound degrees of freedom (positive integer) Calculation Result Output...
  • Page 457 7-11-11 Distributions Definition of Terms prob : χ cumulative probability ( , 0 < < 1) degrees of freedom (positive integer) Calculation Result Output Inv : inverse χ cumulative distribution Example Probability : 0.6092146 Degrees of freedom : 4 • Statistics Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [Inverse χ...
  • Page 458 7-11-12 Distributions Example Data : 1.5 Degrees of freedom of numerator : 24 Degrees of freedom of denominator : 19 • Statistics Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [F PD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values.
  • Page 459 7-11-13 Distributions Example Lower bound : 1.5 (upper bound : ∞) Degrees of freedom of numerator : 24 Degrees of freedom of denominator : 19 • Statistics Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [F CD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values.
  • Page 460 7-11-14 Distributions Example Probability : 0.1852 Degrees of freedom of numerator : 24 Degrees of freedom of denominator : 19 • Statistics Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [Inverse F CD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values.
  • Page 461 7-11-15 Distributions Example Trials : 5 Specifi ed trial : 3 Probability of success : 0.63 • Statistics Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [Binomial PD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>].
  • Page 462 7-11-16 Distributions Example Trials : 5 Specified trial : 3 Probability of success : 0.63 • Statistics Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [Binomial CD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>].
  • Page 463 7-11-17 Distributions Example Binomial cumulative probability : 0.61 Trials : 5 Probability of success : 0.63 • Statistics Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [Inverse Binomial CD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>].
  • Page 464 7-11-18 Distributions Example Specifi ed trial : 10 Mean : 6 • Statistics Wizard Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [Poisson PD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. (5) To display the graph, tap $ .
  • Page 465 7-11-19 Distributions u Program, eActivity or Main Application Command: PoissonCD  Command Syntax value, μ value Input Example: PoissonCD 3,2.26 Inverse Poisson Cumulative Distribution Menu: [Distribution]-[Inverse Poisson CD] Description: This command calculates the inverse of the Poisson cumulative distribution. Σ Σ Minimum value of the upper bound of summation which satisfies the inequality m =? (integer, m > 0) Definition of Terms prob prob :� Poisson cumulative probability (0 Poisson cumulative probability (0 <...
  • Page 466 7-11-20 Distributions u Program, eActivity or Main Application Command: InvPoissonCD Command Syntax prob value, μ value Input Example: InvPoissonCD 0.8074,2.26 k Geometric Distribution Geometric Distribution Probability Menu: �Dis��i�u�ion����eo�e��i�� PD� �Dis��i�u�ion����eo�e��i�� PD� PD� � Description: This ��o��and ��al��ula�es �he p�o�a�ili�y �ha� a �ando� va�ia�le �ha� follows a geo�e��i��...
  • Page 467 7-11-21 Distributions Geometric Cumulative Distribution Menu: [Distribution]-[Geometric CD] Description: This command calculates the probability that a random variable that follows a geometric distribution will be a given value or less. Defi nition of Terms specifi ed trial (positive integer) : probability of success (0 <...
  • Page 468 7-11-22 Distributions Inverse Geometric Cumulative Distribution Menu: [Distribution]-[Inverse Geo CD] Description: This command calculates the inverse of the geometric cumulative distribution. Σ Σ Minimum value of the upper bound of summation which satisfies the inequality m =? (positive integer) Definition of Terms prob prob :�...
  • Page 469: Statistical System Variables

    7-12-1 Statistical System Variables 7-12 Statistical System Variables Performing a statistical calculation, graphing operation, or other operation causes calculation results to be assigned to pre-arranged system variables. For more information, see the “System Variable Table” on page α-7-1. 20060301...
  • Page 470: Chapter 8 Using The Geometry Application

    Chapter Using the Geometry Application The Geometry application allows you to draw and analyze geometric figures. You can draw a triangle and specify values to change the size of its sides so they are 3:4:5, and then check the measurement of each of its angles.
  • Page 471: Geometry Application Overview

    8-1-1 Geometry Application Overview 8-1 Geometry Application Overview The Geometry application provides you with the following capabilities. • The [Draw] menu provides commands for drawing points, lines, polygons, regular polygons, circles, ellipses, and other geometric figures. You can also draw functions. Once drawn, a figure can be moved or edited as required.
  • Page 472 8-1-2 Geometry Application Overview • Tapping the toolbar’s right arrow button displays a measurement box. The measurement box displays information for the items that are selected on the window. For example, you can view the coordinates of a point, the length and slope of a line segment, the size of an angle, etc.
  • Page 473: Starting Up The Geometry Application

    8-1-3 Geometry Application Overview Starting Up the Geometry Application Use the following procedure to start up the Geometry application. u ClassPad Operation On the application menu, tap G. This causes a blank Geometry application window to appear. Use this area to draw the figures you want.
  • Page 474: File Menu

    8-1-4 Geometry Application Overview k File Menu To do this Select this File menu item: Discard the current window contents and create a new file Open an existing file Open Save the current window contents to a file Save k Edit Menu To do this: Select this Edit menu item: Undo or redo the last operation...
  • Page 475 8-1-5 Geometry Application Overview k View Menu Tap this Or select this To do this: button: View menu item: Select a segment, line, or part of a figure (page 8-3-1) Select Start a box zoom operation Zoom Box Activate the pan function for dragging the Graph window with the stylus Enlarge the display image Zoom In...
  • Page 476 8-1-6 Geometry Application Overview k Toolbar Button The operation described below is available from the toolbar only. To do this: Do this: Activate Toggle Select (page 8-3-2) Tap i and then tap a figure. Tapping a button highlights it, indicating that the button’s function is turned on. k About the Measurement Box Tapping the u button to the right of the toolbar takes you to the measurement box.
  • Page 477: Drawing Figures

    8-2-1 Drawing Figures 8-2 Drawing Figures This section explains how to use the Geometry application to draw various types of figures. It also explains how to use the geometric construction tools to investigate theorems and properties in Geometry. Using the Draw Menu The [Draw] menu makes it easy to draw a variety of different figures.
  • Page 478 8-2-2 Drawing Figures • Use [Edit] - [Clear All] to clear the screen after experimenting with a draw operation. u To draw a line segment using the menu command (1) Tap [Draw] and then [Line Segment]. • This highlights the line segment button on the toolbar. (2) Tap the screen where you want the line segment to begin, and a point will be drawn, and then tap the point where you want it to end.
  • Page 479 8-2-3 Drawing Figures u To draw a line segment using the toolbar (1) Tap the second down arrow on the toolbar. This opens the [Draw] menu’s icon palette. (2) Tap the line segment button on the toolbar to highlight it. (3) Tap the screen where you want the line segment to begin.
  • Page 480 8-2-4 Drawing Figures u To add a labeled point to an existing line You can use the following procedure to add a labeled point to an existing line, to a side of an n-gon, to the periphery of a circle or ellipse, etc. (1) Tap [Draw] and then [Point].
  • Page 481 8-2-5 Drawing Figures u To draw a ray Example: To draw a ray and then determine its ) linear equation by dropping the ray into the Main or eActivity application window (1) Tap [Draw] and then [Ray]. • This highlights the ray button on the toolbar. (2) Tap two points on the screen.
  • Page 482 8-2-6 Drawing Figures u To draw a vector (1) Tap [Draw] and then [Vector]. • This highlights the vector button on the toolbar. (2) Tap the point where you want the vector to start, and then its end point. • You could also tap one point, and then drag to the vector end point.
  • Page 483 8-2-7 Drawing Figures u To draw a function Example: To draw – 1 (1) Tap [Draw], [Function], and then [f( • This causes the Function dialog box and a soft keyboard to appear. (2) Input the function. (3) Tap [OK] to draw it. 20060301...
  • Page 484 8-2-8 Drawing Figures u To draw a polar equation graph Note In this example the [Function Angle] setting of the Geometry Format dialog box is set to “Radian”. See page 1-9-10 for more information. (1) Tap [Draw], [Function], and then [Polar]. •...
  • Page 485 8-2-9 Drawing Figures • You can drag a polar curve from the Geometry window and drop it into a Main or eActivity θ window. Or, for example, you can drag the equation ) from the Main or eActivity window and drop it into the Geometry window as shown below. u To draw a parametric equation graph Note In this example the [Function Angle] setting of the Geometry Format dialog box is set to...
  • Page 486 8-2-10 Drawing Figures (2) Input the following expressions and values: t = cos(t), t = sin(t), tmin = 0, tmax = 360 (3) Tap [OK]. • This displays a parametric equation graph as shown here. • You can display equations such as ( )) on the Geometry window by dragging the equation and dropping it into the Main or eActivity window.
  • Page 487 8-2-11 Drawing Figures u To draw an ellipse using the [Ellipse] - [Axes] command Note When you draw an ellipse using the [Ellipse] - [Axes] command, you need to specify the following three elements: center point, Point 1 and Point 2. Point 1 defines the minor axis (nearest point on the edge from the center point) and Point 2 defines the major axis (farthest point on the edge from the center point).
  • Page 488 8-2-12 Drawing Figures u To draw an ellipse using the [Ellipse] - [Foci] command Note An ellipse is the locus of points, the sum of whose distances from two fixed points (called foci) is a constant. An ellipse drawn using the [Ellipse] - [Foci] command is drawn in accordance with this definition.
  • Page 489 8-2-13 Drawing Figures (3)Tap the point you want to specify as Point 3. • This specifies the point you tap as Point 3 and draws the ellipse. • Instead of tapping the screen to specify Point 3, you could also drag the stylus on the display.
  • Page 490 8-2-14 Drawing Figures u To draw a hyperbola Note A hyperbola is the locus of points, the difference of whose distances from two fixed points (called foci) is a given value. A hyperbola drawn using the [Hyperbola] command is drawn in accordance with this definition.
  • Page 491 8-2-15 Drawing Figures (3) Tap the point you want to specify as Point 3. • This specifies the point you tap as Point 3 and draws the hyperbola. • Instead of tapping the screen to specify Point 3, you could also drag the stylus on the display.
  • Page 492 8-2-16 Drawing Figures u To draw a parabola Note A parabola is the locus of points equidistant from a point (the focus) and a line (the directrix). A parabola drawn using the [Parabola] command is drawn in accordance with this definition. When you draw an parabola with the [Parabola] command, you need to specify three different points: a line to define the directrix (Point 1 and Point 2) and one point for the focus.
  • Page 493 8-2-17 Drawing Figures u To draw a polygon (1) Tap [Draw] and then [Polygon]. • This highlights the polygon button on the toolbar. (2) Tap the point from which you want the polygon to start. (3) Sequentially tap each of the vertices of the polygon. (4) Finally, tap the start point again to complete the polygon.
  • Page 494: Inserting Text Strings Into The Screen

    8-2-18 Drawing Figures Inserting Text Strings into the Screen You can insert text strings into the screen while working on the Geometry application window. u To insert a text string into a screen (1) Tap [Draw] and [Text]. • This displays the Text dialog box and a soft keyboard. (2) Input the text you want on the dialog box.
  • Page 495: Attaching An Angle Measurement To A Figure

    8-2-19 Drawing Figures Drag and Drop Text on the Geometry window can be dragged to the Main or eActivity window. You can also drop text from these application windows into the Geometry window. Attaching an Angle Measurement to a Figure The measurement of an angle formed by two sides of a figure can be...
  • Page 496 8-2-20 Drawing Figures u To attach an angle measurement to a figure Example: To attach the measurement of angle A in the triangle ABC (1) Draw the triangle. (2) Tap G . Next, tap side AB and then side AC to select them. (3) Tap [Draw] and then [Attached Angle].
  • Page 497 8-2-21 Drawing Figures Example: To drag the angle measurement attached to interior angle A of triangle ABC to its exterior complementary angle (Dragging to the complementary (Dragging to the opposite angle of A) angle of the opposite angle of A) •...
  • Page 498: Displaying The Measurements Of A Figure

    8-2-22 Drawing Figures Displaying the Measurements of a Figure You can display measurements on the Geometry application window. The measurements change dynamically as you manipulate the figure. A List of [Measurement] Submenu Commands on the [Draw] Menu Names of Commands Meanings of Each Command Angle Angle between two lines...
  • Page 499 8-2-23 Drawing Figures (3) Tap [Draw], [Measurement], and then [Angle]. This shows the angle measurement on the screen. • Method 2: Selecting the value in the measurement box and dropping it directly into the Geometry application window (1) Tap G and select elements AB and AC. (2) Tap the u button to the right of the toolbar.
  • Page 500 8-2-24 Drawing Figures (3) Select (highlight) value in the measurement box and drop it into the screen below. This displays the specified angle measurement on the screen as shown below. • Method 3: Tapping the measurement icon button to the left of the measurement box (1) Tap G and select elements AB and AC.
  • Page 501: Displaying The Result Of A Calculation That Uses On-Screen Measurement Values

    8-2-25 Drawing Figures Displaying the Result of a Calculation that Uses On-screen Measurement Values You can use the [Expression] command and the commands on the [Measurement] sub- menu to perform calculations using the angle value, line length, surface area, and other measurement values attached to a figure, and display the result on the Geometry window.
  • Page 502 8-2-26 Drawing Figures (8) Tap the u button to the right of the toolbar. This will display the measurement box. The above will also display numeric labels for each measurement currently on the • screen. Numeric labels (9) Now you can use the numeric labels to specify measurement values in the calculation you input in the measurement box.
  • Page 503: Using The Special Shape Submenu

    8-2-27 Drawing Figures Using the Special Shape Submenu The [Special Shape] submenu allows you to draw specially shaped figures automatically. Simply select the type of figure you want from the menu, and then touch the screen with the stylus to draw it. Or, touch the screen with your stylus and drag to create a box indicating the size of the figure you would like to draw.
  • Page 504 8-2-28 Drawing Figures u To draw a triangle (1) Tap [Draw], [Special Shape], and then [Triangle]. • This highlights the triangle button on the toolbar. (2) Perform either of the following two operations to draw the triangle. • Tap the screen with the stylus. This automatically draws the acute triangle you selected.
  • Page 505 8-2-29 Drawing Figures (3) Perform either of the following two operations to draw the regular polygon. • Tap the screen with the stylus. This automatically draws the polygon you selected. • Place the stylus on the screen and drag diagonally in any direction. This causes a selection boundary to appear, indicating the size of the polygon that will be drawn.
  • Page 506: Using The Construct Submenu

    8-2-30 Drawing Figures Using the Construct Submenu The [Construct] submenu provides you with the means to study various geometric theorems. In addition to tools for constructing a perpendicular bisector, perpendicular line, angle bisector, midpoint, intersection, parallel lines and a tangent to a curve, you can also translate, rotate, reflect, dilate, or transform a figure.
  • Page 507 8-2-31 Drawing Figures u To construct a perpendicular bisector (1) Draw a line segment. (2) Tap G , and then select the line segment. (3) Tap [Draw], [Construct], and then [Perp. Bisector]. • This draws a perpendicular bisector through your line segment. u To construct an angle bisector (1) Draw two line segments so they form an angle.
  • Page 508 8-2-32 Drawing Figures u To construct a midpoint (1) Draw a line segment. (2) Tap G , and then select the line segment. (3) Tap [Draw], [Construct], and then [Midpoint]. • This adds a midpoint to the segment. u To construct the point of intersection of two lines (1) Draw two lines that intersect.
  • Page 509 8-2-33 Drawing Figures u To construct a perpendicular line that passes through a specified point on a line (1) Draw a line segment or an infinite line. (2) Draw a point on the line through which you want the perpendicular line to pass. (3) Tap G , and then select the point and the line.
  • Page 510 8-2-34 Drawing Figures u To construct a tangent to a curve through a specified point (1) Draw a curve, such as an ellipse. (2) Tap [Draw], [Construct], and then [Tangent to Curve]. • This highlights the tangent to a curve button on the toolbar. (3) Tap the point of tangency on the curve.
  • Page 511 8-2-35 Drawing Figures (4) Tap [OK]. • This translates line segment AB in accordance with the vector value you input, and draws line segment A’B’. u To translate a line segment by selecting a vector (1) Draw a line segment (AB), and a vector to use in the translation. Next, select the line segment.
  • Page 512 8-2-36 Drawing Figures u To reflect a line segment with respect to a specified line of symmetry (1) Draw a line segment. (2) Draw a line to use as the line of symmetry. (3) Tap G , and then select the line segment. (4) Tap [Draw], [Construct], and then [Reflection].
  • Page 513: Transformation Using A Matrix Or Vector (General Transform)

    8-2-37 Drawing Figures u To dilate a line segment toward a specified center point (1) Draw a line segment, and then select it. (2) Tap [Draw], [Construct], and then [Dilation]. • This highlights the dilation button on the toolbar. (3) Tap the center of dilation. •...
  • Page 514 8-2-38 Drawing Figures • All of the steps in the procedure below are performed using the Geometry application only. You can also use the Main application or eActivity application to perform matrix calculations and obtain the same transformation. You can drag a figure from Geometry to Main, which transforms values (matrix) and performs calculation, and drag the values (matrix) obtained as a result from Main to Geometry to draw the transformed figure.
  • Page 515 8-2-39 Drawing Figures (5) Tap [OK]. • This draws triangle A’B’C’, which is symmetrical to triangle ABC about the -axis. (6) Tap anywhere outside of the triangles to deselect the currently selected triangle. Next, select triangle A’B’C’. (7) Tap [Draw], [Construct], and then [General Transform]. (8) Now, to perform parallel displacement on triangle A’B’C’...
  • Page 516 8-2-40 Drawing Figures (9) Tap [OK]. • This performs the parallel displacement and draws triangle A’’B’’C’’. Note • In the above example, we performed the transformation and the parallel displacement operations separately. You could also perform both operations at the same time, if you want.
  • Page 517 8-2-41 Drawing Figures k (a) Operation Example The following procedure assumes that the results produced by the procedure under “General Transform Example” on page 8-2-37 are still on the Geometry application window. u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap J to start up the Main application. (2) Tap the right most down arrow button on the Main application toolbar.
  • Page 518 8-2-42 Drawing Figures (5) After clearing the Main application work area, try repeating steps (3) and (4) for points A’ and A’’. • This displays the expression that transformed the coordinates of point A’ to the coordinates of point A’’. Observe this area of the expression.
  • Page 519 8-2-43 Drawing Figures (5) Select the triangle and drag it to the cursor location in the Main application work area. • This inputs a matrix that shows the coordinates of the triangle’s three vertices into the work area. (6) Here, try multiplying by the matrix [[–1, 0], [0, 1]] to transform the matrix obtained above to a form that is symmetrical about the -axis.
  • Page 520 8-2-44 Drawing Figures (7) Select the matrix obtained as the calculation result, and drag it to the Geometry window. • This draws a triangle that is symmetrical to the original triangle about the -axis. 20060301...
  • Page 521: Editing Figures

    8-3-1 Editing Figures 8-3 Editing Figures This section provides details about moving, copying, and deleting Geometry application figures. Selecting and Deselecting Figures Before you can execute certain editing commands, you must first select the figure you want to edit. There are two figure selection modes: Select and Toggle Select, each of which is described below.
  • Page 522 8-3-2 Editing Figures k Using Toggle Select on the toolbar. This causes the button to become highlighted, indicating that Toggle Select is enabled. Toggle Select allows you to select and deselect figures. For example, if you have multiple figures selected, Toggle Select will allow you to deselect a single part of the selection.
  • Page 523: Moving And Copying Figures

    8-3-3 Editing Figures Moving and Copying Figures It is easy to move figures or copy and paste figures in Geometry. u To move a figure (1) Draw a figure. (2) Tap G , and then select the figure. (3) Drag the figure to move it to the location you want. (4) Remove the stylus from the screen.
  • Page 524: Pinning An Annotation On The Geometry Window

    8-3-4 Editing Figures Pinning an Annotation on the Geometry Window You can pin an annotation on the Geometry window using the Pin function. By default, annotations are ‘Unpinned’, so they pan or zoom along with the Geometry window. Pinning an annotation fixes its position on the screen so it is always displayed in the same location on the Geometry window.
  • Page 525: Specifying The Number Format Of A Measurement

    8-3-5 Editing Figures Specifying the Number Format of a Measurement You can specify the number format for each measurement on the Geometry window. Example: To specify zero decimal places for measurement values on the Geometry window (1) Select (highlight) the measurement(s). (2) Tap the [Edit], [Properties], and then [Number Format]. This displays the Number Format dialog box as •...
  • Page 526: Using The Measurement Box

    8-3-6 Editing Figures (4) Tap [OK]. This will display the measurement value(s) you • selected in the step 1 using the specified number format. The initial default number format setting for measurement values is “Fix 2”. Using the Measurement Box Tapping the u button to the right of the toolbar displays the measurement box. Tap t to return to the normal toolbar.
  • Page 527 8-3-7 Editing Figures k Viewing the Measurements of a Figure The type of information that appears in the measurement box depends on the figure that is currently selected on the display. If a line segment is selected, for example, the measurement box shows the distance, slope, angle from the -axis, and the equation for that line.
  • Page 528 8-3-8 Editing Figures This icon appears when this Tapping this icon Icon Icon Name Lockable is selected: displays: Two line segments Angle and its Angle supplement formed by the line segments Two circles or arcs, or a line Whether two items are Tangency and circle tangent...
  • Page 529 8-3-9 Editing Figures (3) Select points A, D, and B. • This causes the area of the triangle ADB to appear in the measurement box. (4) Tap anywhere outside of the parallelogram to deselect the current points, and then select points A, D, and C. •...
  • Page 530 8-3-10 Editing Figures (4) Tap the down arrow next to the measurement box to cycle through other measurements. • In the case of the line segment, for example, you can view its length, slope, direction, and equation. k Specifying a Measurement of a Figure The following example shows how to specify an angle of a triangle. u To specify the angle of a triangle (1) Check to make sure the [Measure Angle] setting of the Geometry Format dialog box is set to “Degree”...
  • Page 531 8-3-11 Editing Figures k Fixing a Measurement of a Figure By “fixing a measurement” we mean that a constraint is placed on the figure. For example, if we fix (constrain) a point to a circle and move the circle, the point will also move. The following example shows how to fix the size of an angle of a triangle. u To fix the measure of an angle of a triangle (1) Draw the triangle.
  • Page 532 8-3-12 Editing Figures (2) Input a new name (“Center”) in the measurement box. (3) Tap E or the check box to the right side of measurement box. • This displays the changed name on the screen as shown here. 20060301...
  • Page 533: Controlling Geometry Window Appearance

    8-4-1 Controlling Geometry Window Appearance 8-4 Controlling Geometry Window Appearance This section provides information about how to control the appearance of the Geometry application window by scrolling or zooming, and by showing or hiding axes and the grid. Configuring View Window Settings You can use the following procedures to configure settings that control the appearance of the Geometry application window.
  • Page 534: Selecting The Axis Setting

    8-4-2 Controlling Geometry Window Appearance Selecting the Axis Setting Tap q , or tap [View] and then [Toggle Axes] to cycle through the four settings shown below. Axes off, values off Axes on, values off Axes on, values on Axes on, values on and grid on •...
  • Page 535: Toggling Integer Grid Display On And Off

    8-4-3 Controlling Geometry Window Appearance Toggling Integer Grid Display On and Off You can toggle integer grid display on and off by tapping [View] and then [Integer Grid]. The [Integer Grid] command on the [View] menu has a check mark next to it while integer grid display is turned on.
  • Page 536 8-4-4 Controlling Geometry Window Appearance (4) Remove the stylus from the display and the area within the selection boundary expands to fill the entire Graph window. u To use Zoom In and Out Example 1: To zoom in on a circle (1) Draw a circle. (2) Tap [View] and then [Zoom In], or tap W . •...
  • Page 537 8-4-5 Controlling Geometry Window Appearance u To use Zoom to Fit (1) Draw the figure or figures you want. • If what you are drawing does not fit on the display, scroll the image as you draw it. • For information about scrolling the screen, see “Using Pan to Shift the Display Image” on page 8-4-6.
  • Page 538: Using Pan To Shift The Display Image

    8-4-6 Controlling Geometry Window Appearance Using Pan to Shift the Display Image Panning makes it easy to shift the display image by dragging with the stylus. • The screenshot in this section uses the “Axes on, values on” setting described under “Selecting the Axis Setting” on page 8-4-2. u To use Pan Example: To pan the image of a circle (1) Draw a circle.
  • Page 539: Working With Animations

    8-5-1 Working with Animations 8-5 Working with Animations An animation consists of one or more point/curve pairs, in which the curve can be a line segment, circle, ellipse, or function. You build an animation by selecting a point/curve pair, and then adding it to an animation. Using Animation Commands You can build and run an animation either by executing menu commands or by using the animation toolbar that appears when you tap [View] and then [Animation UI].
  • Page 540 8-5-2 Working with Animations u To add an animation and run it (1) Plot a point and draw an arc. Or, you could draw a circle, ellipse, line segment, or function instead of an arc. (2) Select the point and arc. (3) Tap [Edit], [Animate], and then [Add Animation]. (4) Tap [Edit], [Animate], and then [Go (once)], [Go (repeat)], or [Go (to and fro)].
  • Page 541 8-5-3 Working with Animations • You can repeat the above procedure to create multiple points that move simultaneously. Try this: • Draw a line segment and plot another point. • Select the line segment and the point. • Repeat steps (3) and (4) on page 8-5-2. Notice that both animations go at the same time! •...
  • Page 542 8-5-4 Working with Animations (3) Tap [Edit], [Animate], and then [Go (once)]. • This causes the point to travel around the circumference of the circle. u To replace the current animation with a new one (1) Select the point and curve for the new animation. (2) Tap [Edit], [Animate], and then [Replace Animation]. •...
  • Page 543 8-5-5 Working with Animations (6) Select line segments AB and DE, enter 90 in the measurement box, and tap the check box next to the measurement box. • This fixes the angle between AB and DE at 90 degrees. (7) Select only line segments DE and DC, and then tap the down arrow next to the measurement box.
  • Page 544 8-5-6 Working with Animations (15) Tap [Edit], [Animate], and then [Trace]. • This should cause a parabola to be traced on the display. Note that line segment AB is the directrix and point C is the focus of the parabola. (16) With point D still selected, tap [Edit], [Animate], and then [Go (once)].
  • Page 545 8-5-7 Working with Animations Traces This item shows the specified trace point. Tapping [Remove] cancels the trace point setting. (3) While the lower window is active, tap O and then [Close] to close the animation editing window. u To view an animation table (1) Draw a triangle and a line segment above the triangle. (2) Tap the right arrow button to display the measurement box.
  • Page 546 8-5-8 Working with Animations (6) With the line and vertex point still selected, tap [Edit], [Animate], and then [Add Animation]. (7) Now, select only one side of the triangle. (8) Tap [Edit], [Animate], and then [Go (once)]. (9) Tap # next to the measurement box. •...
  • Page 547: Using The Geometry Application With Other Applications

    8-6-1 Using the Geometry Application with Other Applications 8-6 Using the Geometry Application with Other Applications You can display the Geometry application from within the eActivity or Main application. This is a great feature that allows you to visualize the relationship between Algebra and Geometry. You can, for example, drag a figure from the Geometry window to the eActivity window to see its corresponding mathematical expression.
  • Page 548 8-6-2 Using the Geometry Application with Other Applications (4) Select the circle and drag it to the first available line in the eActivity window. • This inserts the equation of the circle in the eActivity window. (5) You can now experiment with the data in the eActivity window. •...
  • Page 549 8-6-3 Using the Geometry Application with Other Applications Example 2: To drag two sides of a triangle from the Geometry window to the Main window u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap m to display the application menu, and then tap J to start the Main application. (2) Tap 3 to display the Geometry window in the lower half of the screen.
  • Page 550 8-6-4 Using the Geometry Application with Other Applications (5) Press E. • Notice that the solution is the same as the coordinates of point A. • To show the coordinates of A, just select point A. Its coordinates will be displayed in the status bar.
  • Page 551: Copy And Paste

    8-6-5 Using the Geometry Application with Other Applications • When the Geometry application cannot determine what is dropped into it, the dropped data is displayed as text. Copy and Paste In addition to drag and drop, you can also copy figures or columns from an animation table, and paste them into another application.
  • Page 552: Managing Geometry Application Files

    8-7-1 Managing Geometry Application Files 8-7 Managing Geometry Application Files This section covers file management operations such as save, open, delete, rename, move, etc. • You can also use the Variable Manager (page 1-8-1) to manage Geometry application files. File Operations u To save a file (1) Tap [File] and then [Save]. •...
  • Page 553 8-7-2 Managing Geometry Application Files u To open an existing file (1) Tap [File] and then [Open]. • This displays the Files dialog box. (2) Open the folder that contains the file you want to open. (3) Tap the name of the file you want to open so it is selected, and then tap [Open]. u To search for a file (1) Tap [File] and then [Open].
  • Page 554 8-7-3 Managing Geometry Application Files u To save a file under a different name (1) Tap [File] and then [Save]. • This displays the Files dialog box. (2) Tap the name of the folder where you want to save the file so it is selected. (3) Input up to 8 bytes for the new name under which you want to save the file.
  • Page 555: Folder Operations

    8-7-4 Managing Geometry Application Files u To rename a file (1) Tap [File] and then [Open]. • This displays the Files dialog box. (2) Tap the name of the file you want to rename so it is selected. (3) Tap [File] and then [Rename]. •...
  • Page 556 8-7-5 Managing Geometry Application Files u To delete a folder Warning! Deleting a folder also deletes all files inside of it. Please double-check to make sure you no longer need the contents of a folder before deleting it. (1) Tap [File] and then [Open]. •...
  • Page 557: Chapter 9 Using The Numeric Solver Application

    Chapter Using the Numeric Solver Application This chapter provides information about the functions of the Numeric Solver application, referred to as NumSolve, and explains how to perform Numeric Solver procedures. Numeric Solver lets you obtain the value of any variable in an equation without the need to transform or simplify the equation.
  • Page 558: Numeric Solver Application Overview

    9-1-1 Numeric Solver Application Overview 9-1 Numeric Solver Application Overview This section describes the configuration of the Numeric Solver application windows and provides basic information about Numeric Solver menu and commands. Starting Up the Numeric Solver Application Use the following procedure to start up the Numeric Solver application. u ClassPad Operation On the application menu, tap N.
  • Page 559 9-1-2 Numeric Solver Application Overview k aMenu Select this a menu item: To do this: Clear all 1-character input variables (a through z) Clear a–z Initialize the upper boundary and lower boundary Initialize Bound Change the convergence range Convergence Important! •...
  • Page 560: Using Numeric Solver

    9-2-1 Using Numeric Solver 9-2 Using Numeric Solver Numeric Solver lets you obtain the value of any variable in an equation, without the need to transform or simplify the equation. Example: t is the time it would take for an object thrown straight up with initial velocity v to reach height h.
  • Page 561 9-2-2 Using Numeric Solver (6) Tap 1 , or tap [Solve] and then [Execute] on the Numeric Solver menu. • The [Left–Right] value shows the difference between the left side and right side results. • Numeric Solver solves functions by calculating approximations based on Newton’s method. This means that solutions may include errors that are not actual solutions. The accuracy of solutions can be determined by viewing the [Left–Right] value. The closer the [Left–Right] value is to zero, the more accurate the results. • If ClassPad judges that the displayed results are not converging sufficiently, it displays the message “Did not converge. Do you wish to continue a calculation?” Tap [Yes] to continue, or [No] to cancel the calculation. Example: Solve the equation 86 = 56.01205897 log(61− x ) • In this example, the initial convergence value is 1 −13. This is the default setting of the ClassPad unit. u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap m to display the application menu, and then tap N. (2) k 9 (3) Input the equation as written, then tap w . 86=56.0bc05897l6b-X)w • The variable x is automatically selected because it is the only variable in the equation. (4) Tap 1 , or tap [Solve] and then [Execute] on the Numeric Solver menu. • This completes the procedure. If the software is unable to converge to a solution, steps (5) through (8) apply. (5) The error message appears.
  • Page 562 9-2-3 Using Numeric Solver (6) Tap then [Convergence]. (7) Enter 10 and then tap [OK]. (8) Tap 1 , or tap [Solve] and then [Execute] on the Numeric Solver menu. • The software is now able to converge to a solution. 20060301...
  • Page 563: Chapter 10 Using The Eactivity Application

    10-4 Working with eActivity Files 10-5 Transferring eActivity Files eActivity Data Download Center A variety of eActivity files are available for download at the CASIO Website. Visit the URL below for more information. http://edu.casio.com/products/classpad/ • After you download an eActivity file, you will need to use FA-CP1 software to transfer it from your computer to your ClassPad.
  • Page 564: Eactivity Application Overview

    10-1-1 eActivity Application Overview 10-1 eActivity Application Overview The eActivity application lets you input and edit text, mathematical expressions, and ClassPad application data, and save your input in a file called an “eActivity”. The techniques you will use are similar to those of a standard word processor, and they are easy to get used Starting Up the eActivity Application Use the following procedure to start up the eActivity application.
  • Page 565: Eactivity Application Menus And Buttons

    10-1-2 eActivity Application Overview eActivity Application Menus and Buttons This section explains the operations you can perform using the menus and toolbar buttons of the eActivity application. • For information about the O menu, see “Using the O Menu” on page 1-5-4. k File Menu Select this File To do this:...
  • Page 566 10-1-3 eActivity Application Overview k Insert Menu Tap this Or select this To do this: button Insert menu item: Insert a calculation row — Calculation Row — Text Row Insert a text row — Insert a Geometry-linked data row Geometry Link Insert an application data strip Strip - Graph Strip - Graph Editor...
  • Page 567: Eactivity Application Status Bar

    10-1-4 eActivity Application Overview k Other Buttons The operations described below are available from the toolbar only. There are no corresponding menu commands for these buttons. To do this: Tap this button: Open the Files dialog box (page 10-2-2) Toggles a calculation result between standard (fractional result) and decimal (approximate result) Recalculate the equation just for the current line where the cursor is currently located...
  • Page 568 10-1-5 eActivity Application Overview When the shift operation is assigned to the ClassPad z key, you can select a range of characters with the left and right cursor keys. Simply press the ClassPad z key and then press e or d . Each press of the cursor key will select (highlight) the next character in the applicable direction.
  • Page 569: Creating An Eactivity

    10-2-1 Creating an eActivity 10-2 Creating an eActivity This provides a general overview of eActivity operations, from starting up the eActivity application to saving an eActivity file. It also presents precautions you need to keep in mind when managing eActivity files. Basic Steps for Creating an eActivity The following are the basic steps you need to perform when creating an eActivity.
  • Page 570 10-2-2 Creating an eActivity (3) After the eActivity is the way you want, tap [File] and then [Save]. • This displays the Files dialog box. Tap here to create a new folder. This is a list of folders and files. Select the name of the folder where you want to Enter up to 20 characters for...
  • Page 571: Managing Eactivity Files

    10-2-3 Creating an eActivity Managing eActivity Files This section covers file management operations like save, open, delete, rename, move, etc. Performing one of these operations displays a Files dialog box like the ones shown below. The buttons that appear in the dialog box depend on the operation you performed to display the Files dialog box.
  • Page 572: Inserting Data Into An Eactivity

    10-3-1 Inserting Data into an eActivity 10-3 Inserting Data into an eActivity The following describes the four types of data you can insert into an eActivity. Text Row A text row can be used to insert text data and mathematical expression text in natural format.
  • Page 573 10-3-2 Inserting Data into an eActivity • The toolbar button for switching between input modes appears as u while the cursor is located in a text row, and while the cursor is located in a calculation row. u To insert a Text Row (1) Tap to change a row to the Text Input mode.
  • Page 574: Inserting A Calculation Row

    10-3-3 Inserting Data into an eActivity u To bold text (1) Drag the stylus across the range of text you want to bold so it is selected (highlighted). (2) Tap B . (3) To unbold text, select it and then tap again. → ← Important! • You cannot bold numeric expressions of a natural display expression that you input with the 2D soft keyboard. Inserting a Calculation Row Calculation rows let you perform calculations in an eActivity. When you input a mathematical expression, the output expression (result) appears, right justified, in the next line. An eActivity that contains only calculation rows looks very much like the Main application window. Note that you can edit the input expression, but not the output expression (result). You can also copy, paste, drag and drop input and output expressions. Both the input and output rows scroll independently in a horizontal direction. • If the input expression of a calculation row is not a valid expression, the row will contain only the input expression, without an output expression. u To select the input mode (1) On the eActivity window toolbar, tap the fifth button from the left ( u / <...
  • Page 575 10-3-4 Inserting Data into an eActivity • The toolbar button for switching between input modes appears as u while the cursor is located in a text row, and while the cursor is located in a calculation row. u To insert a Calculation Row (1) Tap u to change a row from the Text Input mode to the Calculation Input mode.
  • Page 576: Inserting An Application Data Strip

    10-3-5 Inserting Data into an eActivity ” in the example below and pressing E causes all of the Changing “10 S ” to “20 S expressions under “20 S ” to be re-calculated. • Press E. • Tap to the right of “10”. •...
  • Page 577 10-3-6 Inserting Data into an eActivity k Inserting an Application Data Strip into an eActivity Tap the [Insert] menu or the right most toolbar down arrow button, and then select the command or button that corresponds to the type of application data you want to insert. Select this Or tap To insert this type of application data:...
  • Page 578 10-3-7 Inserting Data into an eActivity Example 1: To insert a Geometry data strip u ClassPad Operation (1) From the eActivity menu, tap [Insert], [Strip], and then [Geometry]. • This inserts a Geometry data strip, and displays the Geometry window in the lower half of the screen.
  • Page 579 10-3-8 Inserting Data into an eActivity (4) Tap the title box of the Geometry data strip and enter the title you want. • If you want to input more data into the eActivity, tap the next line or use the [Insert] menu to select the type of strip you want to insert next.
  • Page 580 10-3-9 Inserting Data into an eActivity (2) On the Graph window, draw the graph you want. • Tap the ! button to display the Graph & Table application’s Graph Editor window, enter a function to graph, and then graph the function. For details about inputting functions on the Graph Editor window and graphing functions, see Chapter 3.
  • Page 581 10-3-10 Inserting Data into an eActivity Example 3: To use Notes in an eActivity Notes is a simple text editing tool for taking notes or including in-depth explanations within an eActivity. You can use Notes to store information for later use, or as a place to jot down ideas.
  • Page 582 10-3-11 Inserting Data into an eActivity (3) After you finish entering text, you can close the Notes window by tapping S , or tapping O and then [Close]. • You can use the Notes window to enter notes, homework assignments, in-depth details, etc. • All information you enter is treated as text. • When inputting text into a Notes window, the cursor will jump down to the beginning of the next line when the right edge of the current line is reached. • The Notes application is available only in eActivity. Example 4: To use the Picture Viewer with eActivity You can use Picture to display a bitmap image (PICT data type) in an eActivity. You can also save displayed images with a different name. • �or details about data whose data type is PICT, see �Variable �ata Types�� on page 1-�-3. �or details about data whose data type is PICT, see �Variable �ata Types�� on page 1-�-3.
  • Page 583 10-3-12 Inserting Data into an eActivity u ClassPad Operation (1) On the eActivity window, tap [Insert], [Strip], and then [Picture]. • This will insert a Picture strip and display the Picture window in the lower half of the display. (2) Tap [File] - [Open]. •...
  • Page 584 10-3-13 Inserting Data into an eActivity (4) Tap [Open]. • This will display the PICT data you selected in the Picture window. A scroll bar will appear along the bottom of the window if the PICT data does not fit. •...
  • Page 585: Strip Help Text

    10-3-14 Inserting Data into an eActivity Strip Help Text You can add help text to any strip. A strip that has help text is indicated by a button. Tapping a button will display the help window along with the application window. Help window Applicaiton window u To add help text to a strip...
  • Page 586: Moving Information Between Eactivity And Applications

    10-3-15 Inserting Data into an eActivity (3) Input the help text into the help window. • The operations you can perform while inputting help text are the same as those you use for eActivity notes. For more information, see “Example 3: To use Notes in an eActivity”...
  • Page 587 10-3-16 Inserting Data into an eActivity k Drag and Drop You can drag and drop text or mathematical expressions between eActivity and other applications. You can also drag and drop within an eActivity. Depending on the application, you can drag text and mathematical expressions from an eActivity to another application window.
  • Page 588: Inserting A Geometry Link Row

    10-3-17 Inserting Data into an eActivity Inserting a Geometry Link Row A Geometry Link row dynamically links data in the Geometry window with the corresponding data in an eActivity. You can display lines and figures drawn in Geometry as values and mathematical expressions in a Geometry Link row.
  • Page 589 10-3-18 Inserting Data into an eActivity (4) Tap [Insert] and then [Geometry Link]. • This inserts a Geometry Link row in the next line. Geometry Link row Symbol (5) Tap the Geometry window to make it active. (6) Tap one side of the triangle to select it, and then drag it to the link symbol in the eActivity window.
  • Page 590: Working With Eactivity Files

    10-4-1 Working with eActivity Files 10-4 Working with eActivity Files You can perform basic file operations on eActivity files. You can open previously saved files, edit an existing file, and save a file under a new name. Opening an Existing eActivity Perform the following steps to open an existing eActivity file.
  • Page 591: Browsing The Contents Of An Eactivity

    10-4-2 Working with eActivity Files Browsing the Contents of an eActivity • When you first open an eActivity, its data appears on the window starting from line 1. Use the scroll bar to scroll the window contents if necessary. • To view the contents of an application data strip in the eActivity, tap the expand button (which is the icon in the data strip).
  • Page 592: Modifying The Data In An Application Data Strip

    10-4-3 Working with eActivity Files Modifying the Data in an Application Data Strip Modifying application data on an application window in the lower eActivity window causes the eActivity data to be modified as well. If you change the equation in the eActivity Graph window, for example, the new graph will become the data of the eActivity.
  • Page 593 10-4-4 Working with eActivity Files u To save an edited eActivity under a different name (1) On the eActivity window, tap { , or tap [File] and then [Save]. • This displays the Files dialog box. (2) If you want, tap the name of the folder where you want the new eActivity file to be saved.
  • Page 594: Transferring Eactivity Files

    10-5-1 Transferring eActivity Files 10-5 Transferring eActivity Files Note the following precautions when using the ClassPad’s data communication function to transfer eActivity files with another ClassPad unit or a computer. Transferring eActivity Files between Two ClassPad Units k Transferring eActivity Files to Another ClassPad Unit To transfer an eActivity file to another ClassPad unit, the receiving unit must support all of the following types of application data strips.* Application Data Strips...
  • Page 595: Transferring Eactivity Files Between A Classpad Unit And A Computer

    10-5-2 Transferring eActivity Files k Transferring eActivity Files from Another ClassPad Unit To transfer an eActivity file from another ClassPad unit, your ClassPad unit must support all of the application data strips that are supported by the sending unit. Important! • If you transfer an eActivity file from a ClassPad unit that supports application data strips that are not supported by this ClassPad unit, your will not be able to open the file.
  • Page 596: Chapter 11 Using The Presentation Application

    Chapter Using the Presentation Application The Presentation application lets you capture screenshots of other application windows. Screenshots can be used in the classroom or for other presentations simply by connecting the ClassPad to an OHP projector. 11-1 Presentation Application Overview 11-2 Building a Presentation 11-3 Managing Presentation Files 11-4 Playing a Presentation...
  • Page 597: Presentation Application Overview

    11-1-1 Presentation Application Overview 11-1 Presentation Application Overview The Presentation application lets you capture screenshots produced by the ClassPad, and arrange them into a “presentation” that you can play back. With this application you can build and play a presentation, and edit the contents of a presentation. A presentation, for example, can show how to obtain intermediate and final results of calculation operations.
  • Page 598: Starting Up The Presentation Application

    11-1-2 Presentation Application Overview Starting Up the Presentation Application Use the following procedure to start up the Presentation application. u ClassPad Operation On the application menu, tap P. Presentation Application Window Tapping P on the application menu starts the Presentation application and displays its initial screen.
  • Page 599: Presentation Application Menus And Buttons

    11-1-3 Presentation Application Overview Presentation Application Menus and Buttons This section explains the operations you can perform using the menus and buttons of the Presentation application’s initial screen. k Initial Screen Menu Commands and Buttons Tap this Or select this To do this: button: menu item:...
  • Page 600: Screen Capture Precautions

    11-1-4 Presentation Application Overview Screen Capture Precautions Note the following precautions when capturing screens for a presentation. • The operation that is performed when you tap h depends on the current [Screen Copy To] setting as described below. Tapping h does this: When the [Screen Copy To] setting is this: Outer Device Sends the screenshot to an external device.
  • Page 601: Building A Presentation

    11-2-1 Building a Presentation 11-2 Building a Presentation Presentations are created by capturing screenshots that are produced by the applications of the ClassPad. Before actually beginning to capture the screenshots, it is important to carefully think about and plan the type of information you want to include in your presentation so that your screenshots display the information that you want.
  • Page 602: Adding A Blank Page To A Presentation

    11-2-2 Building a Presentation (6) With the screen you want to capture on the display, tap h. • The currently displayed screen is captured as soon as you tap h. Its image is added to the pages of the presentation file you selected in step (3). •...
  • Page 603 11-2-3 Building a Presentation u To insert a blank page into a presentation (1) On the Presentation application initial screen, tap the button next to the presentation file into which you want to insert the blank page, so it is selected. This file is selected Button (2) Tap a and then [White Screen].
  • Page 604: Managing Presentation Files

    11-3-1 Managing Presentation Files 11-3 Managing Presentation Files After you create a presentation file, you can rename it or delete it. u To rename a presentation file (1) On the Presentation application initial screen, tap the name of the file you want to rename so it is selected.
  • Page 605 11-3-2 Managing Presentation Files Important! • PICT format image data files (PICT data type variables) captured with the h icon are stored in folder that is created when you create a Presentation file. • The “Presystm” folder (whose contents you can view with the Variable Manager) contains files for managing presentations.
  • Page 606: Playing A Presentation

    11-4-1 Playing a Presentation 11-4 Playing a Presentation This section explains the various methods you can use to play a presentation. Using Auto Play With auto play, the pages of the presentation are scrolled automatically at a fixed interval. u ClassPad Operation (1) On the Presentation application initial screen, tap the button next to the presentation file you want to play, so it is selected.
  • Page 607: Using Manual Play

    11-4-2 Playing a Presentation • You can configure Presentation preferences to specify the page change speed and to turn page number display in the status bar on or off. For more information, see “11-6 Configuring Presentation Preferences”. • You can also configure auto play so it repeats when the final page of a presentation is reached. For more information, see “Using Repeat Play”...
  • Page 608: Using Repeat Play

    11-4-3 Playing a Presentation (4) Tapping while the final page of the presentation is displayed causes the message “End of Files” to appear in the status bar. • Tapping while the message “End of Files” is in the status bar exits the manual play operation and displays the Presentation initial screen.
  • Page 609: Editing Presentation

    11-5-1 Editing Presentation Pages 11-5 Editing Presentation Pages This section explains how to use the Editing mode of the Presentation application to modify the pages of an existing presentation. About the Editing Tool Palette An editing tool palette appears on the display whenever you enter the Editing mode. The following describes how to use the editing tool palette.
  • Page 610 11-5-2 Editing Presentation Pages Editing tool palette Page scroll buttons (3) Use the editing tool palette buttons to edit the pages. • For details about editing operations, see “Editing Operations” on page 11-5-3. • You can drag the editing tool palette and page scroll buttons to any location on the display. Simply use the stylus to drag the handle of the palette or buttons.
  • Page 611: Editing Operations

    11-5-3 Editing Presentation Pages Editing Operations This section provides details about the page editing operations you can perform with the Presentation application’s editing tool palette. u To move a page (1) Enter the Editing mode of the Presentation application (page 11-5-1). (2) Use the page scroll buttons to display the page you want to move.
  • Page 612 11-5-4 Editing Presentation Pages u To copy and paste a page (1) Enter the Editing mode of the Presentation application (page 11-5-1). (2) Use the page scroll buttons to display the page you want to copy, and then tap t . •...
  • Page 613 11-5-5 Editing Presentation Pages (6) To save the result of the text insert operation, tap { and then tap [OK] on the confirmation dialog box that appears. u To clear the bottom half of the screen (1) Enter the Editing mode of the Presentation application (page 11-5-1). (2) Use the page scroll buttons to display the page whose bottom half you want to clear.
  • Page 614 11-5-6 Editing Presentation Pages u To draw a straight line or an arrow on a page (1) Enter the Editing mode of the Presentation application (page 11-5-1). (2) Use the page scroll buttons to display the page on which you want to draw a straight line or arrow.
  • Page 615: Using The Eraser

    11-5-7 Editing Presentation Pages Using the Eraser The eraser allows you to erase parts of an image, text, arrows, or lines you have added to a page. u To erase part of a page with the eraser (1) Enter the Editing mode of the Presentation application (page 11-5-1). (2) Use the page scroll arrows to display the page that contains the figures you want to erase.
  • Page 616: Configuring Presentation Preferences

    11-6-1 Configuring Presentation Preferences 11-6 Configuring Presentation Preferences You can use the procedure below to configure various Presentation application preferences. u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap O, and then [Presentation]. • This displays the Presentation dialog box. (2) Use the Presentation dialog box to configure the preferences you want. To do this: Do this: Send hard copy data generated by tapping...
  • Page 617 11-6-2 Configuring Presentation Preferences • The following examples show the area of the screen that is captured when you tap h while the [Half Screen Capturing] check box is selected. The captured areas are indicated by the thick boundaries in each example. Sample Screenshot Captured Image Data Captured Image Data...
  • Page 618: Presentation File Transfer

    11-7-1 Presentation File Transfer 11-7 Presentation File Transfer A presentation file is actually a kind of user folder (called a “presentation folder”) that contains the images that make up the presentation. This folder may be transferred to another ClassPad unit or a computer in order to play the presentation. Caution •...
  • Page 619: Chapter 12 Using The Program Application

    Chapter Using the Program Application The Program application comes in handy when you need to perform the same calculation a number of times. You can create programs that automate graphing and other operations. 12-1 Program Application Overview 12-2 Creating a New Program 12-3 Debugging a Program 12-4 Managing Files 12-5 User-defined Functions...
  • Page 620: Program Application Overview

    12-1-1 Program Application Overview 12-1 Program Application Overview The Program application consists of a Program Editor for inputting and editing programs, and a Program Loader for loading and executing existing programs. Starting Up the Program Application Use the following procedure to start up the Program application. u ClassPad Operation On the application menu, tap p.
  • Page 621 12-1-2 Program Application Overview k Program Loader Window Menus and Buttons Tap this Or select this To do this: button: menu item: — O - Program Loader Display the Program Loader window O - Program Editor Display the Program Editor window O - Program Output Display the Program Output window —...
  • Page 622: Program Editor Window

    12-1-3 Program Application Overview Program Editor Window You can use the Program Editor window to input a new program or to edit an existing program. You can also use the Program Editor window to input and edit user-defined functions. u To display the Program Editor window (1) On the application menu, tap p to start up the Program application.
  • Page 623 12-1-4 Program Application Overview k Program Editor Window Menus and Buttons The following describes the menu and button operations you can perform on the Program Editor window. To do this: Tap this button: Or select this menu item: O - Program Loader Display the Program Loader window O - Program Editor —...
  • Page 624 12-1-5 Program Application Overview To do this: Select this sub-menu item: Select this menu item: Ctrl - : — Input a command from the — Ctrl - ⇒ [Ctrl] menu Ctrl - Jump Lbl, Goto • For details about each command, see “12-6 Ctrl - If If, Then, ElseIf, Else, IfEnd...
  • Page 625 12-1-6 Program Application Overview To do this: Select this sub-menu item: Select this menu item: Input a command from the Misc - Statistics(1) StatGraph, StatGraphSel, [Misc] menu Scatter, xyLine, NPPlot, • For details about each Histogram, MedBox, command, see “12-6 ModBox, NDist, Broken, Program Command LinearR, MedMed, QuadR,...
  • Page 626 12-1-7 Program Application Overview To do this: Select this sub-menu item: Select this menu item: Input a command from the Misc - Setup(1) On, Off, DefaultSetup, [Misc] menu SetStandard, SetDecimal, • For details about each SetReal, SetComplex, command, see “12-6 SetDegree, SetGrad, Program Command SetRadian, SetNormal,...
  • Page 627: Creating A New Program

    12-2-1 Creating a New Program 12-2 Creating a New Program This section explains the steps you need to perform in order to create a new program. General Programming Steps The following are the general steps for creating and running a program. 1.
  • Page 628 12-2-2 Creating a New Program u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap m to display the application menu, and then p. (2) Tap O , or tap [Edit] and then [New File]. (3) Configure the settings for the new file as described below. •...
  • Page 629 12-2-3 Creating a New Program (6) After the program is the way you want, tap { , or tap [Edit] and then [Save File] to save it. • To run this program see “Running a Program” on page 12-2-5. • If a message appears when you try to save the program, make the necessary corrections and try again.
  • Page 630 12-2-4 Creating a New Program k Specifying the File Type Tapping O or tapping [Edit] and then [New File] on the Program Editor window displays the dialog box shown above. Tap the [Type] down arrow button and then select one of the options described below from the list of options that appears.
  • Page 631: Running A Program

    12-2-5 Creating a New Program Running a Program The following procedure shows how to run the sample program we input under “Creating and Saving a Program” on page 12-2-1. u ClassPad Operation (1) Display the Program Loader window. • From the Program Editor window, tap ) , or tap O and then [Program Loader]. •...
  • Page 632: Pausing Program Execution

    12-2-6 Creating a New Program Pausing Program Execution You can specify where execution of a program should pause by including either a Pause command or a Wait command inside the program. k Using the Pause Command A Pause command causes program execution to pause when it reaches that point. To resume program execution, tap the button on the right side of the status bar (which will also cause the button to disappear).
  • Page 633: Configuring Parameter Variables And Inputting Their Values

    12-2-7 Creating a New Program Configuring Parameter Variables and Inputting Their Values If you input the names of variables used in a program into the parameter variable box when inputting or editing a program on the Program Editor window, you will be able to input values for the variables on the Program Loader window when you run the program.
  • Page 634: Using Subroutines

    12-2-8 Creating a New Program k Local Variables A local variable is a variable that can be created temporarily and used in a program. Use the Local command to create a local variable. Syntax: Local <variable name> ( indicates a space.) Example: Local abc The above creates a local variable named “abc”.
  • Page 635 12-2-9 Creating a New Program Example 1: Jumping to a subroutine without assigning values to the subroutine’s parameter variables Main Program Input A Input B ← Sub1( ) Jumps to subroutine program “Sub1” Print C Subroutine (Program Name: “Sub1”) A+B S C Return Example 2: Jumping to a subroutine while assigning values to the subroutine’s parameter variables...
  • Page 636: Debugging A Program

    12-3-1 Debugging a Program 12-3 Debugging a Program A programming error that causes a program to behave in a manner not intended by the writer of the program is called a “bug”. Finding and eliminating such errors is called “debugging the program”.
  • Page 637: Modifying An Existing Program To Create A New One

    12-3-2 Debugging a Program Modifying an Existing Program to Create a New One You can use the procedure described below to recall an existing program, modify it, and then run the result as a new program. This helps reduce key input requirements. The following shows how to modify the “OCTA”...
  • Page 638 12-3-3 Debugging a Program (3) Select the program you want to open and edit, as described below. For this setting: Do this: Tap the down arrow button, and then select Type “Program(Normal)”. Tap the down arrow button, and then select the folder that Folder contains the program you want to edit.
  • Page 639 12-3-4 Debugging a Program (7) After saving the program, tap ) , or tap O and then [Program Loader] to display the Program Loader window. (8) On the dialog box that appears, tap the [Name] down arrow button, and then tap the name of the file you input in step (6) (TETRA).
  • Page 640: Searching For Data Inside A Program

    12-3-5 Debugging a Program Searching for Data Inside a Program You can search for data inside a program by specifying a keyword. Example: To search for the letter “A” within the “OCTA” program u ClassPad Operation (1) From the Program Editor window, select the program you want to search (“OCTA” in this example).
  • Page 641: Managing Files

    12-4-1 Managing Files 12-4 Managing Files Renaming a File Use the following procedure when you want to change the name of a file. u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap 5 to display the Variable Manager. • This displays a list of folders. • You may need to tap the icon and scroll the toolbar to see the 5 icon.
  • Page 642: Changing The File Type

    12-4-2 Managing Files Changing the File Type You can use the following procedures to change the file type. u To change a program file to a text file While a program file is open, tap [Edit], [Mode Change], and then [ ' Text]. u To change a text file to a program file While a text file is open, tap [Edit], [Mode Change], and then [ ' Normal]. •...
  • Page 643: User-Defined Functions

    12-5-1 User-defined Functions 12-5 User-defined Functions ClassPad lets you configure calculation operations as user-defined functions, which can then be used inside of numeric expressions just like its built-in functions. User-defined functions can also be called up in other applications. • The Program Editor window is used for creating user-defined functions. •...
  • Page 644 12-5-2 User-defined Functions • Input user-defined function arguments as parameter Parameter variable variables. For more information about parameter variables, see page “Configuring Parameter Variables and Inputting Their Values” on page 12-2-7. (6) After the function is the way you want, tap { , or tap [Edit] and then [Save File] to save •...
  • Page 645: Executing A User-Defined Function

    12-5-3 User-defined Functions • You can include up to 99 arguments in a function. • If you do not specify a folder, the function is stored in the current folder. • A function defined using the Define command can contain only a single expression. You cannot link multiple expressions or commands using colons (:) or carriage returns.
  • Page 646: Editing A User-Defined Function

    12-5-4 User-defined Functions Editing a User-defined Function To edit an existing user-defined function, use the same procedures as those described under “Modifying an Existing Program to Create a New One” on page 12-3-2. Editing procedures are the same, regardless of whether you originally created the function using the Define command or Program Editor.
  • Page 647: Program Command Reference

    12-6-1 Program Command Reference 12-6 Program Command Reference Using This Reference The following table shows the conventions that are used in the descriptions of this section. If you see something like this: It means this: A boldface word, like Input The boldface word is a command. This indicates a space.
  • Page 648: Program Application Commands

    12-6-2 Program Command Reference Program Application Commands k Program Notation (Carriage Return) Function: Performs a carriage return operation. Description In Program Editor, tap the w button to input a carriage return. • The carriage return can be used in a user program. It cannot, however, be used in a manual calculation performed in the Main application.
  • Page 649 12-6-3 Program Command Reference k Input GetKey Syntax: GetKey  <variable name> Function: This command assigns the code number of the last key pressed to the specified variable. Description • This command assigns the code number of the last key pressed to the specified variable. The following shows a list of available code numbers.
  • Page 650 12-6-4 Program Command Reference GetPen Syntax: GetPen<variable name 1>, <variable name 2> Function: This command assigns the coordinates of the point tapped on the screen to a specified variable. Description This command assigns the -coordinate (horizontal axis) to <variable 1> and the -coordinate (vertical axis) to <variable 2>.
  • Page 651 12-6-5 Program Command Reference InputFunc Syntax: InputFunc  <user-defined function name> (<argument>[,<argument>…]) [,"<string 1>"[,"<string 2>"]] Function: When program execution reaches the InputFunc command, the user is prompted to input the contents of the user-defined function. Example: InputFunc v(v0, t), "To define function v0(m/s), t(sec)", "define function" Description •...
  • Page 652 12-6-6 Program Command Reference k Output About the Program Output window The “Program Output window” shows text displayed by program execution. The term “Program Output window” does not include dialog boxes displayed by Message and other commands. • Only one Program Output window can be stored at a time. Executing the ClrText command or using Program Loader to execute a text file clears the currently stored Program Output window.
  • Page 653 12-6-7 Program Command Reference Locate Syntax 1: Locate  < -coordinate>, < -coordinate>, <expression> Syntax 2: Locate  < -coordinate>, < -coordinate>, "<string>" Function: This command displays the result of the specified expression or the specified text string at the specified coordinates on the display screen. Description •...
  • Page 654 12-6-8 Program Command Reference PrintNatural Syntax:   PrintNatural  <expression>[,"<string>"] Function: This command pauses program execution and displays the result of the specified expression in natural format. Description • A text string enclosed within quotation marks (" ") or a variable name can be specified for "<string>".
  • Page 655 12-6-9 Program Command Reference Break Syntax: Break Function: This command terminates a loop and causes execution to advance to the next command following the loop process. Description • Break terminates a loop and causes execution to advance to the next command following the loop process.
  • Page 656 12-6-10 Program Command Reference For~To~(Step~)Next Syntax: For  <expression 1> S <control variable name>  To  <expression 2> [Step  <expression 3>] [<statement>] … Next <expression 1> is the initial value, <expression 2> is the end value, and <expression 3> is the step.
  • Page 657 12-6-11 Program Command Reference If~Then~ElseIf~Else~IfEnd Syntax 1: If  <expression> Then Then <block> [<statement>] … IfEnd Function 1 • If the expression is true, the statement in the Then block is executed. After that, execution advances to the next statement after IfEnd. •...
  • Page 658 12-6-12 Program Command Reference Syntax 4: If  <expression> Then If Then <block> [<statement>] … ElseIf  <expression> Then ElseIf Then <block> [<statement>] … Else Else <block> [<statement>] … IfEnd Function 4 • If the expression is true, the statement in the If Then block is executed. After that, execution advances to the next statement after IfEnd.
  • Page 659 12-6-13 Program Command Reference Pause Syntax: Pause Function: This command pauses program execution and displays a pause indicator on the right side of the status bar. Description • You can perform manual operations on the ClassPad display screen while program execution is paused by the Pause command.
  • Page 660 12-6-14 Program Command Reference Switch~Case~Default~SwitchEnd Syntax: Switch  <expression 1> Case  <expression 2> [<statement>] … Break Case  <expression 3> … [<statement>] … Break … Case  <expression > [<statement>] … Break [Default] [<statement>] … SwitchEnd <expression 1> through <expression >...
  • Page 661: Application Command List

    12-6-15 Program Command Reference While~WhileEnd Syntax: While  <expression> [<statement>] … WhileEnd <expression> is a condition that evaluates to true or false. Function: The specified statements are repeated as long as the condition is true. Description • The statements between While~WhileEnd are repeated as long as the condition is true.
  • Page 662 12-6-16 Program Command Reference ClrGraph Syntax: ClrGraph Function: Clears the Graph window and returns View Window parameters to their initial default settings. Syntax: Function: Clears sketch elements (lines and other figures sketched on the Graph window), and graphs drawn using drag and drop. DispFTable Syntax: DispFTable...
  • Page 663 12-6-17 Program Command Reference DrawGraph Syntax: DrawGraph  [<expression>] Function: Graphs the selected expression or an expression specified as a parameter. Description: <expression> has a = type expression on the right side. Graphing of any other type of expression is not supported by this command. Example: DrawGraph: Graphs the currently selected expressions.
  • Page 664 12-6-18 Program Command Reference GTSelOn Syntax: GTSelOn  <graph number> Function: Selects a graph expression. Description: Graph number range: 1 to 100 Horizontal <y Syntax: Horizontal  -coordinate> Function: Draws a horizontal line. Inverse Syntax: Inverse  < graph number> Function: Graphs the inverse of a function.
  • Page 665 12-6-19 Program Command Reference PlotOff Syntax: PlotOff  < -coordinate>, < -coordinate> Function: Turns off display of the plot at the specified coordinates. PlotOn Syntax: PlotOn  < -coordinate>, < -coordinate> Function: Turns on display of the plot at the specified coordinates. plotTest( Syntax: plotTest(<...
  • Page 666 12-6-20 Program Command Reference PTThick Syntax: PTThick  <graph number> Function: Specifies “Thick” ( ) as the graph line type. Description: Graph number range: 1 to 100 PxlChg Syntax: PxlChg  < -dot>, < -dot> Function: Toggles display of the specified pixel on and off. Example: PxlChg 5,1 PxlOff...
  • Page 667 12-6-21 Program Command Reference RclVWin Syntax: RclVWin  <variable name> Function: Recalls View Window values, which were previously saved under the specified name. Example: RclVWin WIN1 SheetActive <sheet number> Syntax: SheetActive  "<sheet name>" Function: Selects the sheet that contains the expression to be graphed. Description: Even after a sheet is renamed, it can still be specified using its previous sheet number.
  • Page 668 12-6-22 Program Command Reference StoPict Syntax: StoPict  <picture name> Function: Assigns a name to a Pict image and stores it. Example: StoPict Pict1 StoVWin Syntax: StoVWin  <variable name> Function: Assigns a name to View Window values and stores them. Example: StoVWin VWIN1 TangentLine Syntax:...
  • Page 669 12-6-23 Program Command Reference ViewWindow Syntax1: ViewWindow  LogP  , [xmin value], [xmax value], [xscale value], [ymin value], [ymax value], [yscale value], [t θ min value], [t θ max value], [t θ step value] Syntax 2: ViewWindow CallUndef Syntax 3: ViewWindow Function: Syntax 1: Specifies View Window values.
  • Page 670 12-6-24 Program Command Reference k 3D ClearSheet3D <sheet number> Syntax: ClearSheet3D  "<sheet name>" Function: Deletes the sheet name and expressions on the sheet, and returns its settings to their default values. Omitting the argument causes all sheets to be cleared. Draw3D Syntax: Draw3D Function: Draws a 3D graph using current settings. SelOn3D Syntax: SelOn3D  < graph number> Function: Selects a 3D graph function. Also makes the graph sheet that contains the graph function active, and turns off graphing of all the other functions on the sheet. SheetActive3D <sheet number> Syntax: SheetActive3D  "<sheet name>" Function: Activates the specified 3D graph sheet. SheetName3D Syntax: SheetName3D ...
  • Page 671 12-6-25 Program Command Reference k Conics DrawConics Syntax: DrawConics Function: Draws a conics graph based on the data registered on the Conics Editor window. k Sequence DispDfrTbl Syntax: DispDfrTbl Function: Creates and displays an arithmetic sequence table. DispDQTbl Syntax: DispDQTbl Function: Creates and displays a progression of difference table. DispFibTbl Syntax: DispFibTbl Function: Creates and displays a Fibonacci sequence table. DispQutTbl Syntax: DispQutTbl Function: Creates and displays a geometric sequence table. DispSeqTbl Syntax: DispSeqTbl Function: Creates and displays a recursion table. 20060301...
  • Page 672 12-6-26 Program Command Reference DrawSeqCon, DrawSeqPlt Syntax: DrawSeqCon DrawSeqPlt Function: Graphs a recursion expression whose vertical axis is or ) and whose horizontal axis is using a generated number table, in accordance with the conditions of each command. Description: DrawSeqCon draws a connect type graph, while DrawSeqPlt draws a plot type graph. DrawSeqEtrCon, DrawSeqEtrPlt Syntax: DrawSeqEtrCon DrawSeqEtrPlt Function: Graphs a recursion expression whose vertical axis is Σ (Σ or Σ ) and whose horizontal axis is using a generated number table, in accordance with the conditions of each command. Description: DrawSeqEtrCon draws a connect type graph, while DrawSeqEtrPlt draws a plot type graph. SeqSelOff Syntax: SeqSelOff  Function: Deselects the specified sequence expression. Specifying “ E”, “ E”, or “ E” as the argument activates [Explicit]. Specifying any other argument activates [Recursive].
  • Page 673 12-6-27 Program Command Reference SeqSelOn Syntax: SeqSelOn  Function: Selects the specified sequence expression. Specifying “ E”, “ E”, or “ E” as the argument activates [Explicit]. Specifying any other argument activates [Recursive]. SeqType Syntax: SeqType  " " " " " " " " " " Function: Specifies the recursion type. Description: Specifying “ ” as the argument activates [Explicit]. Specifying any other argument activates [Recursive]. k Statistics abExpReg >][, Syntax: abExpReg  List, List[,[FreqList (or 1)][, [<...
  • Page 674 12-6-28 Program Command Reference CubicReg >][, Syntax: CubicReg  List, List[,[FreqList (or 1)][, [< ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ Function: Performs regression. Description List: Name of list for storing -axis data List: Name of list for storing -axis data FreqList: Name of list for storing frequency of “ List” and “ List” data • “FreqList” can be omitted. Doing so sets “1” for “FreqList”. • “ ” is the Graph Editor name ( 2, ...) that is the copy destination of the regression expression. Copy is not performed when “ ” is skipped. • “On/Off” turns Residual calc on or off. Residual calc is turned off when this setting is skipped. DefaultListEditor Syntax: DefaultListEditor Function: Initializes the sort sequence and display contents of the list on the Stat Editor window (list1 to list6).
  • Page 675 12-6-29 Program Command Reference LinearReg Syntax: LinearReg  List, List[,[FreqList (or 1)][, [< >][, ⋅ Function: Performs regression. Description List: Name of list for storing -axis data List: Name of list for storing -axis data FreqList: Name of list for storing frequency of “ List” and “ List” data • “FreqList” can be omitted. Doing so sets “1” for “FreqList”. • “ ” is the Graph Editor name ( 2, ...) that is the copy destination of the regression expression. Copy is not performed when “ ” is skipped. • “On/Off” turns Residual calc on or off. Residual calc is turned off when this setting is skipped. LogisticReg Syntax: LogisticReg  List, List[,[< >][, ⋅...
  • Page 676 12-6-30 Program Command Reference MultiSortA Syntax 1: MultiSortA  < list name> Syntax 2: MultiSortA  < base list name>, <subordinate list name>, <subordinate list name>, ... Function: Sorts a statistical list in ascending order. Description • Syntax 1 performs a simple list sort. • Syntax 2 sorts multiple lists on the base list. Up to five subordinate lists can be specified. MultiSortD Syntax 1: MultiSortD  < list name> Syntax 2: MultiSortD  < base list name>, <subordinate list name>, <subordinate list name>, ... Function: Sorts a statistical list in descending order. Description • Syntax 1 performs a simple list sort.
  • Page 677 12-6-31 Program Command Reference QuadReg Syntax: QuadReg  List, List[,[FreqList (or 1)][,[< >][, ⋅ ⋅ Function: Performs regression. Description List: Name of list for storing -axis data List: Name of list for storing -axis data FreqList: Name of list for storing frequency of “ List” and “ List” data • “FreqList” can be omitted. Doing so sets “1” for “FreqList”. • “ ” is the Graph Editor name ( 2, ...) that is the copy destination of the regression expression. Copy is not performed when “ ” is skipped. • “On/Off” turns Residual calc on or off. Residual calc is turned off when this setting is skipped. QuartReg Syntax: QuartReg  List, List[,[FreqList (or 1)][,[< >][, ⋅...
  • Page 678 12-6-32 Program Command Reference StatGraph Syntax 1: StatGraph  < StatGraph number 1 to 9>, , Graph Type 1, List, List, FreqList (or 1), Plot Type Syntax 2: StatGraph  < StatGraph number 1 to 9>, , Graph Type 2, List, List, FreqList (or 1) Syntax 3: StatGraph  < StatGraph number 1 to 9>, , Graph Type 3, List, List Syntax 4: StatGraph  < StatGraph number 1 to 9>, , Graph Type 4, List, FreqList (or 1)
  • Page 679 12-6-33 Program Command Reference k Setup DefaultSetup Syntax: DefaultSetup Function: Initializes all setup data settings. SetAxes Syntax: SetAxes  Number Function: Turns display of Graph window axes on or off. SetAxes3D Syntax: SetAxes3D  Function: Turns display of axes on (normal), off, or Box (box type coordinate) for 3D graphing. Specifying Box displays the draw area in box form. SetBG } <picture name> Syntax: SetBG  Off Function: Specifies a PICT image for the background. Background image display is turned off when “Off” is specified. SetCellWidth Syntax: SetCellWidth  Function: Specifies the number of rows displayed on the Stat Editor and data table windows.
  • Page 680 12-6-34 Program Command Reference } SetCoord On Syntax: SetCoord  Function: Turns display of Graph window pointer coordinates on or off. SetCoordOff3D Syntax: SetCoordOff3D Function: Turns off display of pointer coordinates for 3D graphing. SetCoordPol3D Syntax: SetCoordPol3D Function: Specifies use of polar coordinates for coordinate display during 3D graphing. SetCoordRect3D Syntax: SetCoordRect3D Function: Specifies use of rectangular coordinates for coordinate display during 3D graphing. SetDecimal Syntax: SetDecimal Function: Specifies the Decimal mode (displays results in decimal format). SetDegree Syntax: SetDegree Function: Specifies “Degree” for the angle unit. SetDeriv } Syntax: SetDeriv ...
  • Page 681 12-6-35 Program Command Reference SetDispGCon } On Syntax: SetDispGCon  Function: Turns display of graph controller arrows during graphing on or off. SetDrawCon Syntax: SetDrawCon Function: Specifies graphing by connecting plotting points with lines. SetDrawPlt Syntax: SetDrawPlt Function: Specifies graphing by plotting points only. SetFix Syntax: SetFix  < integer from 0 to 9> Function: Specifies the fixed number of decimal places. SetFunc Syntax: SetFunc  Function: Turns display of graph function name and function on or off. SetGrad Syntax: SetGrad Function: Specifies “Grad” for the angle unit.
  • Page 682 12-6-36 Program Command Reference SetLabel3D } Syntax: SetLabel3D  Function: Turns display of Graph window axis labels for 3D graphing on or off. SetLeadCursor } Syntax: SetLeadCursor  Function: Turns display of the leading cursor during graphing on or off. SetNormal 1 Syntax: SetNormal  Function: Specifies Normal 1 or Normal 2 as the auto exponential display setting for values. SetRadian Syntax: SetRadian Function: Specifies “Radian” for the angle unit. SetReal Syntax: SetReal Function: Specifies the Real mode (to perform real number calculations). SetSci Syntax: SetSci  < integer from 0 to 9> Function: Specifies the fixed number of significant digits.
  • Page 683 12-6-37 Program Command Reference SetSequence Syntax: SetSequence  StepDisp Function: Turns display of expressions created after graphing on or off or specifies “step display” (StepDisp). Description: When StepDisp is selected, the expression does not appear until you press E. SetSimulGraph } On Syntax: SetSimulGraph  Function: Turn simultaneous drawing of multiple graphs on or off. SetSmryTable } <list name> Syntax: SetSmryTable  VWin Function: Specifies whether summary table generation is View Window dependent or List dependent. Using VWin specifies View Window dependent. SetSmryTableQD On Syntax: SetSmryTableQD  Function: Specifies whether the second derivative will appear in summary tables. SetStandard Syntax: SetStandard Function: Specifies the Standard mode (to leave calculation results as expressions).
  • Page 684 12-6-38 Program Command Reference SetTVariable } <list name> Syntax: SetTVariable  TableInput Function: Specifies the variable reference location for table generation. Description: Use TableInput to specify a range and generate a table. Σ disp On Σ Syntax: disp  Function: Turns display of subtotals for tables on or off. k Folder/Variable Clear_a_z Syntax: Clear_a_z  [<folder name>] Function: Deletes all single letter lower-case named variables from through from the specified folder. Description • If you don’t specify a folder name, the variables of the current folder are cleared. • Deletes all variables, regardless of type (program, etc.), that have the specified variable name. See GetType for information about variable types (page 12-6-39). • Keep in mind that this command clears all data types, including programs, functions, etc. CopyVar Syntax: CopyVar ...
  • Page 685 12-6-39 Program Command Reference DelFolder Syntax: DelFolder  <folder name> Function: Deletes a folder. DelVar Syntax: DelVar  <variable name>, <variable name> ... Function: Deletes a variable. Description: Deletes all variables, regardless of type (program, etc.), that have the specified variable name. See GetType for information about variable types. GetFolder Syntax: GetFolder  <storage variable name> Function: Gets the current folder name and assigns it to a variable as a text string. GetType Syntax: GetType  <variable name>, <storage variable name> Function: Gets the type of the specified variable and assigns it to a storage variable as a text string. Description: The following is a list of variable types. • NUM (real number type) • EXPR (expression type) • STR (string type) • LIST (list type) • MAT (matrix type) • PRGM (program type) • EXE (execute only program type)
  • Page 686 12-6-40 Program Command Reference Local Syntax: Local  <variable name>, <variable name> ... Function: Defines a local variable. Description The following are the merits of local variables. • Since local variables are deleted automatically, use of local variables for temporary storage avoids unnecessary use of available memory. • Since local variables do not affect general variables, you can name local variables without worrying about whether the name you are using is already used by another variable. Lock Syntax: Lock  <variable name>, <variable name> ... Function: Locks variables. LockFolder Syntax: LockFolder  <folder name> Function: Locks the specified folder and all the files currently inside of it. MoveVar Syntax: MoveVar  <variable name>, <current folder name>, <destination folder name> Function: Moves a variable to the specified folder. NewFolder Syntax: NewFolder ...
  • Page 687 12-6-41 Program Command Reference SetFolder Syntax: SetFolder  <folder name> [,<storage variable name>] Function • Makes the specified folder the current folder. Including a variable name at the end of this command assigns the name of the previous current folder to the variable as a text string. • If the specified folder does not exist, this command creates a new folder with the specified name, and makes it the current folder. Unlock Syntax: Unlock  <variable name>, <variable name> ... Function: Unlocks variables. UnlockFolder Syntax: UnlockFolder  <folder name> Function: Unlocks the specified folder and all the files currently inside of it. k Strings A string is a series of characters inside of quotation marks. In a program, strings are used to specify display text. A string made up of numbers (like “123”) or an expression (like “x–1”) cannot be processed as a calculation. To include quotation marks (") or a backslash (\) in a string, put a backslash (\) in front of the quotation marks (") or backslash (\). Example 1: To include Japan: “Tokyo” in a string Print  "Japan:\"Tokyo\"" Example 2: To include main\abc in a string Print ...
  • Page 688 12-6-42 Program Command Reference ExpToStr Syntax: ExpToStr  <expression>,<storage variable name> Function: Converts the result of an input expression to a string and assigns the string to the specified variable. NumToChr Syntax: NumToChr  ,<storage variable name> Function: Converts numeric value to the corresponding text character(s) in accordance with the character code table, and assigns the character(s) as a string to the specified variable. For information about character codes, see Appendix page α -6-1. NumToStr "Fix <integer from 0 to 9>" Syntax: NumToStr  <value>, , <storage variable name> "Sci <integer from 0 to 9>" Function: Converts a numeric value to a string of the specified format, and assigns the resulting string to the specified variable. Example: NumToStr 1.234, "Fix2", StrCmp Syntax: StrCmp  " <string 1>", "<string 2>", <storage variable name> Function: Compares "<string 1>" and "<string 2>" (character code comparison) and assigns the resulting value to the specified variable.
  • Page 689 12-6-43 Program Command Reference StrJoin Syntax: StrJoin  " <string 1>", "<string 2>", <storage variable name> Function: Joins "<string 1>" and "<string 2>" and then assigns the resulting string to the specified variable. StrLeft Syntax: StrLeft  " <string>", , <storage variable name> Function: Copies a string up to the th character from the left, and assigns the resulting string to the specified variable. StrLen Syntax: StrLen  " <string>", <storage variable name> Function: Determines the length of a string (the number of its characters) and assigns the resulting value to the specified variable. StrLwr Syntax: StrLwr  " <string>", <storage variable name> Function: Converts all the characters of a string to lower case and assigns the resulting string to the specified variable.
  • Page 690 12-6-44 Program Command Reference StrRotate Syntax: StrRotate  " <string>", <storage variable name> [, Function: Rotates the left side part and right side part of a string at the th character, and assigns the resulting string to the specified variable. Description: Rotation is to the left when “ ” is positive, and to the right when “ ” is negative. Omitting “ ” uses a default value of +1. Example: StrRotate "abcde", DDD, –2 ← Assigns the string “deabc” to variable DDD. StrShift Syntax: StrShift  " <string>", <storage variable name> [, Function: Shifts a string left or right characters, and assigns the resulting string to the specified variable. Description: Shift is to the left when “ ” is positive, and to the right when “ ” is negative. Omitting “ ” uses a default value of +1. Example: StrShift "abcde", DDD, –2 ← Assigns the string “ abc” to variable DDD.
  • Page 691 12-6-45 Program Command Reference k Other CloseComPort38k Syntax: CloseComPort38k Function: Closes the 3-pin COM port. Example: See the GetVar38k command. GetVar38k Syntax: GetVar38k  <variable name> Function: Receives variable names and variable contents. Description • The OpenComPort38k command must be executed before this command is executed. • The CloseComPort38k command must be executed after this command is executed. Example: To connect two ClassPad units with an SB-62 cable, and transfer the contents of the sending unit’s variable “s” to the receiving unit’s variable “g” Sending Unit Program 123 S s OpenComPort38k SendVar38k s CloseComPort38k Receiving Unit Program OpenComPort38k GetVar38k g CloseComPort38k Notes • Run the receiving unit’s program first, and then run the sending unit’s program. • You can use any commands beside the four data communication commands (Send38k, Receive38k, SendVar38k, or GetVar38k) between the OpenComPort38k and CloseComPort38k commands.
  • Page 692 12-6-46 Program Command Reference OpenComPort38k Syntax: OpenComPort38k Function: Opens the 3-pin COM port. Example: See the GetVar38k command on page 12-6-45. Receive38k Syntax: Receive38k  <variable name> Function: Receives EA-200 data. Description • The OpenComPort38k command must be executed before this command is executed. • The CloseComPort38k command must be executed after this command is executed. • For details about using this command, see the user documentation that comes with the EA-200. • Note that you need to replace all instances of the Receive command in the examples provided in the EA-200 user documentation with the command Receive38k. You should also adjust the other commands in the EA-200 examples so they conform to the ClassPad command syntax and usage as described in this manual. Send38k Syntax: Send38k  <variable name> Function: Sends EA-200 data. Description • The OpenComPort38k command must be executed before this command is executed. • The CloseComPort38k command must be executed after this command is executed. • For details about using this command, see the user documentation that comes with the EA-200. • Note that you need to replace all instances of the Send command in the examples provided in the EA-200 user documentation with the command Send38k. You should also adjust the other commands in the EA-200 examples so they conform to the ClassPad command syntax and usage as described in this manual.
  • Page 693: Including Classpad Functions In Programs

    12-7-1 Including ClassPad Functions in Programs 12-7 Including ClassPad Functions in Programs Including Graphing Functions in a Program Graphing functions let your program graph multiple equations, or overlay multiple graphs on the same screen. Example: DefaultSetup ClrGraph ViewWindow 0, 7.7, 1, –14, 110, 10 GraphType "y=" Define y1(x) = x^4 – x^3 – 24x^2 + 4x + 80 GTSelOn 1 PTDot 1 SheetActive 1...
  • Page 694: Including 3D Graphing Functions In A Program

    12-7-2 Including ClassPad Functions in Programs Including 3D Graphing Functions in a Program The methods for using 3D graphing functions in a program are identical to those for normal (non-3D) graphing functions, except that you can only graph one 3D graph at a time. For information about commands that are unique to 3D graphing, see “3D” on page 12-6-24. Including Table & Graph Functions in a Program Table &...
  • Page 695: Including Recursion Table And Recursion Graph Functions In A Program

    12-7-3 Including ClassPad Functions in Programs Including Recursion Table and Recursion Graph Functions in a Program Recursion table and recursion graph functions can be included in a program to generate number tables and draw graphs. Example: DefaultSetup ViewWindow 0, 6, 1, – 0.01, 0.3, 1 SeqType "a " "–3a ^2 + 2a "...
  • Page 696: Including Statistical Graphing And Calculation Functions In A Program

    12-7-4 Including ClassPad Functions in Programs Including Statistical Graphing and Calculation Functions in a Program Including statistical graphs and calculation functions in a program allows the program to draw statistical graphs and display statistical calculation results. u To perform statistical graphing Example 1: Scatter Diagram {0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4, 5.2} S list1 {–2.1, 0.3, 1.5, 2, 2.4} S list2 StatGraph 1, On, Scatter, list1, list2, 1, Square DrawStat Note that...
  • Page 697 12-7-5 Including ClassPad Functions in Programs u To use statistical calculation functions You can perform the following types of statistical calculations using program commands. • Single-variable statistics • Paired-variable statistics • Regression • Tests • Confidence interval • Probability See “Chapter 7 – Using the Statistics Application” for more information. u To explore statistical data Example: Exploring data with regression StatGraphSel Off...
  • Page 698: Chapter 13 Using The Spreadsheet Application

    Chapter Using the Spreadsheet Application The Spreadsheet application provides you with powerful, take- along-anywhere spreadsheet capabilities on your ClassPad. 13-1 Spreadsheet Application Overview 13-2 Spreadsheet Application Menus and Buttons 13-3 Basic Spreadsheet Window Operations 13-4 Editing Cell Contents 13-5 Using the Spreadsheet Application with the eActivity Application 13-6 Using the Action Menu 13-7 Formatting Cells and Data...
  • Page 699: Spreadsheet Application Overview

    13-1-1 Spreadsheet Application Overview 13-1 Spreadsheet Application Overview This section describes the configuration of the Spreadsheet application window, and provides basic information about its menus and commands. Starting Up the Spreadsheet Application Use the following procedure to start up the Spreadsheet application. u ClassPad Operation On the application menu, tap R.
  • Page 700: Spreadsheet Application Menus And Buttons

    13-2-1 Spreadsheet Application Menus and Buttons 13-2 Spreadsheet Application Menus and Buttons This section explains the operations you can perform using the menus and buttons of the Spreadsheet application window. • For information about the O menu, see “Using the O Menu” on page 1-5-4. k File Menu Select this To do this:...
  • Page 701 13-2-2 Spreadsheet Application Menus and Buttons k Edit Menu Select this To do this: [Edit] menu item: Undo the last action, or redo the action you have just undone Undo/Redo Display a dialog box that lets you show or hide scrollbars, and specify the Options direction the cursor advances when inputting data Automatically resize columns to fit the data into the selected cells...
  • Page 702 13-2-3 Spreadsheet Application Menus and Buttons k Spreadsheet Toolbar Buttons Not all of the Spreadsheet buttons can fit on a single toolbar, tap the button on the far right to toggle between the two toolbars. To do this: Tap this button: Toggle the selected cell(s) between decimal (floating point) and exact display* Toggle the selected cell(s) between bold and normal...
  • Page 703: Basic Spreadsheet Window Operations

    13-3-1 Basic Spreadsheet Window Operations 13-3 Basic Spreadsheet Window Operations This section contains information about how to control the appearance of the Spreadsheet window, and how to perform other basic operations. About the Cell Cursor The cell cursor causes the current selected cell or group of cells to become highlighted. The location of the current selection is indicated in the status bar, and the value or formula located in the selected cell is shown in the edit box.
  • Page 704: Navigating Around The Spreadsheet Window

    13-3-2 Basic Spreadsheet Window Operations (2) On the dialog box that appears, tap the [Cursor Movement] down arrow button, and then select the setting you want. To have the cell cursor behave this way when you register Select this input: setting: Remain at the current cell Move to the next row below the current cell...
  • Page 705 13-3-3 Basic Spreadsheet Window Operations k Jumping to a Cell You can use the following procedure to jump to a specific cell on the Spreadsheet screen by specifying the cell’s column and row. u ClassPad Operation (1) On the [Edit] menu, select [Goto Cell]. (2) On the dialog box that appears, type in a letter to specify the column of the cell to which you want to jump, and a value for its row number.
  • Page 706: Hiding Or Displaying The Scrollbars

    13-3-4 Basic Spreadsheet Window Operations Hiding or Displaying the Scrollbars Use the following procedure to turn display of Spreadsheet scrollbars on and off. By turning off the scrollbars, you make it possible to view more information in the spreadsheet. u ClassPad Operation (1) On the [Edit] menu, tap [Options].
  • Page 707: Selecting Cells

    13-3-5 Basic Spreadsheet Window Operations Selecting Cells Before performing any operation on a cell, you must first select it. You can select a single cell, a range of cells, all the cells in a row or column, or all of the cells in the spreadsheet. Tap here to select the Tap a column entire spreadsheet.
  • Page 708: Using The Cell Viewer Window

    13-3-6 Basic Spreadsheet Window Operations Using the Cell Viewer Window The Cell Viewer window lets you view both the formula contained in a cell, as well as the current value produced by the formula. While the Cell Viewer window is displayed, you can select or clear its check boxes to toggle display of the value and/or formula on or off.
  • Page 709: Editing Cell Contents

    13-4-1 Editing Cell Contents 13-4 Editing Cell Contents This section explains how to enter the edit mode for data input and editing, and how to input various types of data and expressions into cells. Edit Mode Screen The Spreadsheet application automatically enters the edit mode whenever you tap a cell to select it and input something from the keypad.
  • Page 710: Entering The Edit Mode

    13-4-2 Editing Cell Contents • You can tap the data input toolbar buttons to input letters and symbols into the edit box. Entering the Edit Mode There are two ways you can enter the edit mode: • Tapping a cell and then tapping inside the edit box •...
  • Page 711: Basic Data Input Steps

    13-4-3 Editing Cell Contents k Tapping a cell and then inputting something from the keypad • This enters the “quick” edit mode, indicated by a dashed blinking cursor. Anything you input with the keypad will be displayed in the edit box. • If the cell you selected already contains something, anything you input with the quick edit mode replaces the existing content with the new input. • In the quick editing mode, pressing the cursor key registers your input and moves the cell cursor in the direction of the cursor key you press. • Note that you can change to the standard edit mode at any time during the quick edit mode by tapping inside of the edit box. Basic Data Input Steps The following are the basic steps you need to perform whenever inputting or editing cell data. u ClassPad Operation (1) Enter the edit mode. • Either tap a cell (quick edit), or tap a cell and then tap the edit box (standard edit). • See “Selecting Cells” on page 13-3-5 for more information about selecting cells. (2) Input the data you want. • You can input data using the keypad, the [Action] menu, and the input toolbar. See the following sections for more information. (3) After you are finished, finalize the input using one of the procedures below. If you are using this edit mode: Do this to finalize your input: Standard Edit • Tap the s button next to the edit box. • Press the E key. Quick Edit • Press a cursor key. • Or tap the s button next to the edit box. • Or press the E key.
  • Page 712: Inputting A Formula

    13-4-4 Editing Cell Contents Inputting a Formula A formula is an expression that the Spreadsheet application calculates and evaluates when you input it, when data related to the formula is changed, etc. A formula always starts with an equal sign (=), and can contain any one of the following. •...
  • Page 713 13-4-5 Editing Cell Contents (3) Press k to display the soft keyboard. (4) Tap the 0 tab and then tap r , o , w , then press , or on the [Action] menu, tap [row]. (5) Tap cell A1, and then press ). (6) Press E.
  • Page 714: Inputting A Cell Reference

    13-4-6 Editing Cell Contents (15) On the [Edit] menu, tap [Paste]. Learn more about cell referencing below. • Inputting a Cell Reference A cell reference is a symbol that references the value of one cell for use by another cell. If you input “=A1 + B1” into cell C2, for example, the Spreadsheet will add the current value of cell A1 to the current value of cell B1, and display the result in cell C2. There are two types of cell references: relative and absolute. It is very important that you understand the difference between relative and absolute cell references. Otherwise, your spreadsheet may not produce the results you expect. k Relative Cell Reference A relative cell reference is one that changes according to its location on the spreadsheet. The cell reference “=A1” in cell C2, for example, is a reference to the cell located “two columns to the left and one cell up” from the current cell (C2, in this case). Because of this, if we copy or cut the contents of cell C2 and paste them into cell D12, for example, the cell reference will change automatically to “=B11”, because B11 is two columns to the left and one cell up from cell D12. Be sure to remember that relative cell references always change dynamically in this way whenever you move them using cut and paste, or drag and drop. Important! • W hen you cut or copy a relative cell reference from the edit box, it is copied to the clipboard as text and pasted “as-is” without changing. If “=A1” is in cell C2 and you copy “=A1” from the edit box and paste it into cell D12, for example, D12 will also be “=A1”. 20060301 20070301...
  • Page 715 13-4-7 Editing Cell Contents k Absolute Cell References An absolute cell reference is the one that does not change, regardless of where it is located or where it is copied to or moved to. You can make both the row and column of a cell reference absolute, or you can make only the row or only the column of a cell reference absolute, as described below.
  • Page 716: Inputting A Constant

    13-4-8 Editing Cell Contents (4) Tap the cell you want to reference (which will input its name into the edit box automatically) or use the editing toolbar and keypad to input its name. Important! • The above step always inputs a relative cell reference. If you want to input an absolute cell reference, use the stylus or cursor keys to move the editing cursor to the appropriate location, and then use the editing toolbar to input a dollar ($) symbol.
  • Page 717: Using The Fill Sequence Command

    13-4-9 Editing Cell Contents Using the Fill Sequence Command The Fill Sequence command lets you set up an expression with a variable, and input a range of values based on the calculated results of the expression. u To input a range of values using Fill Sequence Example: To configure a Fill Sequence operation according to the following parameters Expression: Change of Value: From 1 to 25...
  • Page 718 13-4-10 Editing Cell Contents • The following shows how the Fill Sequence dialog box should appear after configuring the parameters for our example. (3) After everything is the way you want, tap [OK]. This performs all the required calculations according to your settings, and inserts the •...
  • Page 719: Cut And Copy

    13-4-11 Editing Cell Contents Cut and Copy You can use the [Cut] and [Copy] commands on the Spreadsheet application [Edit] menu to cut and copy the contents of the cells currently selected (highlighted) with the cell cursor. You can also cut and copy text from the edit box. The following types of cut/copy operations are supported.
  • Page 720 13-4-12 Editing Cell Contents • The following shows how cell data is converted to a matrix format when pasted into the edit box. Select the cell where you want to insert the text (A6 in this example), and then Tap [Edit], tap inside the edit and then box.
  • Page 721: Specifying Text Or Calculation As The Data Type For A Particular Cell

    13-4-13 Editing Cell Contents Specifying Text or Calculation as the Data Type for a Particular Cell A simple toolbar button operation lets you specify that the data contained in the currently selected cell or cells should be treated as either text or calculation data. The following shows how the specified data type affects how a calculation expression is handled when it is input into a cell.
  • Page 722: Using Drag And Drop To Copy Cell Data Within A Spreadsheet

    13-4-14 Editing Cell Contents Using Drag and Drop to Copy Cell Data within a Spreadsheet You can also copy data from one cell to another within a spreadsheet using drag and drop. If the destination cell already contains data, it is replaced with the newly dropped data. • When performing this operation, you can drag and drop between cells, or from one location to another within the edit box only.
  • Page 723 13-4-15 Editing Cell Contents k Dragging and Dropping Multiple Cells • When dragging multiple cells, only the cell where the stylus is located has a selection boundary around it. Selection boundary (cursor held against C2) • When you release the stylus from the screen, the top left cell of the group (originally A1 in the above example) will be located where you drop the selection boundary.
  • Page 724: Using Drag And Drop To Obtain Spreadsheet Graph Data

    13-4-16 Editing Cell Contents u To drag and drop within the edit box (1) Select the cell whose contents you want to edit. (2) Tap the edit box to enter the edit mode. (3) Tap the edit box again to display the editing cursor (a solid blinking cursor). (4) Drag the stylus across the characters you want to move, so they are highlighted.
  • Page 725: Recalculating Spreadsheet Expressions

    13-4-17 Editing Cell Contents u To use drag and drop to obtain the data points of a graph Example: To obtain the data points of the bar graph shown below (1) Input data and draw a bar graph. • See “Other Graph Window Operations” on page 13-8-15 for more information on graphing. (2) Tap the Graph window to make it active.
  • Page 726 13-4-18 Editing Cell Contents Example: To assign values to variables and recalculate expressions that contain them. The following procedure shows the recalculate operation while the Spreadsheet application is being accessed from the Main application. u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap J. This starts the Main application and displays the work area.
  • Page 727 13-4-19 Editing Cell Contents (4) On the Main application window, use the following operation to assign values to the variables. 9bcdW0aE 9efgW0bE (5) On the Spreadsheet window, tap cell A1 and input =a+b. Next, tap cell A2 and input =a×b. When you input the above expressions, the results will appear dynamically in cells A1 and A2.
  • Page 728 13-4-20 Editing Cell Contents (6) On the Main application window, assign different values to the variables. Here, assign 789 to variable b as shown below. 9hijW0bE (7) Tap the Spreadsheet application window to make it active. On the [File] menu, tap [Recalculate].
  • Page 729: Importing And Exporting Variable Values

    13-4-21 Editing Cell Contents Importing and Exporting Variable Values You can use the procedures in this section to import the data currently assigned to a variable into a spreadsheet, and to export data in a spreadsheet to a variable. k Importing data assigned to a variable into a spreadsheet You can import the data assigned to a variable into a specific cell or a range of cells in the spreadsheet that is currently open on the ClassPad display.
  • Page 730 13-4-22 Editing Cell Contents (4) After confirming that everything is the way you want, tap [OK]. • This will input the data assigned to the NData variable (in this case, 1234567890) into spreadsheet cell A1 as shown here. u To import the data assigned to a LIST variable Example: To import the list data {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} assigned to the LData variable at cell A1 (1) Tap cell A1 to select it.
  • Page 731 13-4-23 Editing Cell Contents u To import the data assigned to a MAT variable Example: To import the matrix data       assigned to the MData variable at cell A1 (1) Tap cell A1 to select it. (2) On the [File] menu, tap [Import]. • This displays the Import dialog box along with a soft keyboard.
  • Page 732 13-4-24 Editing Cell Contents k Exporting Spreadsheet Data to a Variable You can use the procedures in this section to export the data contained in a specific cell or range of cells in the spreadsheet that is currently open on the ClassPad display. Export of spreadsheet data to the variables of the following data types is supported: LIST (list data), MAT (matrix data), and EXPR (numeric or expression data).
  • Page 733 13-4-25 Editing Cell Contents u To export spreadsheet data to a MAT (Matrix) variable (1) Select the range of cells that contains the data you want to export to a Mat variable. (2) On the [File] menu, tap [Export]. This displays the Export dialog box along with a soft keyboard. (3) Tap the [Type] box down arrow button, and then select “MATRIX”...
  • Page 734: Searching For Data In A Spreadsheet

    13-4-26 Editing Cell Contents Searching for Data in a Spreadsheet The Search command helps you locate specific data in a spreadsheet quickly and easily. k Search Dialog Box The Search command can be executed either by tapping [Search] on the [Edit] menu or by tapping the e button on the toolbar. Executing the Search command displays a search dialog box like the one shown below, along with a soft keyboard.
  • Page 735 13-4-27 Editing Cell Contents k Search Examples Example 1: To search for the letter “a”, regardless of case u ClassPad Operation (1) Display the spreadsheet you want to search. • This example is based on a spreadsheet that contains the data shown below. (2) Tap [Search] on the [Edit] menu or tap the toolbar e button.
  • Page 736 13-4-28 Editing Cell Contents (5) To search for the next instance of the search string, tap [Search Again] on the [Edit] menu or tap the toolbar r button. • Each time you tap the [Search Again] command or the r toolbar button, the search will jump to the next cell that contains the specified search string. • The message “Search String not found in range.” will appear if the string you specified does not exist within the specified range of cells. Tap [OK] to clear the message from the screen. Example 2: To search for calculation expressions that contain the string “+1” In this example, we want the spreadsheet cells that contain a calculation expression ( like =1+2 ) to show the expression, not the calculation result ( 3, for example ). To do this, select “Formulas” for the [Look in] option on the Search dialog box. u ClassPad Operation (1) Display the spreadsheet you want to search. • This example is based on a spreadsheet that contains the data shown below. =a+2 =3+1 =b+1 =8+2 =C+2 =18+2 =d−3 =28+2 =e+1 =39+1 Expressions in each cell Displayed spreadsheet (2) Tap [Search] on the [Edit] menu or tap the toolbar e button. • This displays the Search dialog box.
  • Page 737: Sorting Spreadsheet Data

    13-4-29 Editing Cell Contents (4) Tap [OK]. • This will start the search and the cursor will jump to the first cell found that contains a match for the search string. (5) To search for the next instance of the search string, tap [Search Again] on the [Edit] menu or tap the toolbar r button.
  • Page 738 13-4-30 Editing Cell Contents (2) On the [Edit] menu, tap [Sort]. • This displays the Sort dialog box. The [Range] box will show the range of cells you selected in step 1. (3) Tap the [Key Column] box down arrow button. On the list that appears, select the column you want the sort to be based upon.
  • Page 739: Using The Spreadsheet Application With The Eactivity Application

    13-5-1 Using the Spreadsheet Application with the eActivity Application 13-5 Using the Spreadsheet Application with the eActivity Application You can display the Spreadsheet application from within the eActivity application. This makes it possible to drag data between the Spreadsheet and eActivity windows as desired. Drag and Drop After you open Spreadsheet within eActivity, you can drag and drop information between the two application windows.
  • Page 740 13-5-2 Using the Spreadsheet Application with the eActivity Application (4) Select the cell you want and drag it to the first available line in the eActivity window. This inserts the contents of the cell in the eActivity window. • You can also select something in the edit box and drag it to the eActivity window. If •...
  • Page 741 13-5-3 Using the Spreadsheet Application with the eActivity Application (5) Drag the contents of the edit box to the first available line in the eActivity window. This inserts the contents of the edit box in the eActivity window as a text string. •...
  • Page 742 13-5-4 Using the Spreadsheet Application with the eActivity Application Example 4: Dragging data from eActivity to the Spreadsheet window 20060301...
  • Page 743: Using The Action Menu

    13-6-1 Using the Action Menu 13-6 Using the Action Menu Most of the functions that are available from the [Action] menu are similar to those on the [List-Calculation] sub-menu of the standard [Action] menu. Spreadsheet [Action] Menu Basics The following example demonstrates the basic procedure for using functions within the [Action] menu.
  • Page 744 13-6-2 Using the Action Menu u ClassPad Operation (1) With the stylus, tap the cell where you want the result to appear. • In this example, we would tap cell A1. (2) On the [Action] menu, tap [List-Calculation] and then [sum] on the sub-menu. •...
  • Page 745 13-6-3 Using the Action Menu (4) Tap the s button to the right of the edit box. • This automatically closes the parentheses, calculates the sum of the values in the selected range, and displays the result in cell A1. •...
  • Page 746: Action Menu Functions

    13-6-4 Using the Action Menu Action Menu Functions This section describes how to use each function in the [Action] menu. Please note that start cell:end cell is equivalent to entering a list. u row Function: Returns the row number of a specified cell. Syntax: row(cell) Example: To determine the row number of cell A7 and input the result in cell A1:...
  • Page 747 13-6-5 Using the Action Menu u count Function: Returns a count of the number of cells in the specified range. Syntax: count(start cell[:end cell]) Example: To count the number of cells in the block whose upper left corner is located at A7 and whose lower right corner is located at C12, and input the result in cell A1: 20060301...
  • Page 748 13-6-6 Using the Action Menu u cellif Function: Evaluates an equality or inequality, and returns one of three different expressions based on whether the equality/inequality is true (expression 1), false (expression 2), or inconclusive (expression 3). With this function, the equality/inequality can include a string as in the following example: cellif(A1="Red", 0,1,2).
  • Page 749 13-6-7 Using the Action Menu u min Function: Returns the lowest value contained in the range of specified cells. Syntax: min(start cell[:end cell][,start cell[:end cell]] / [,value]) Example: To determine the lowest value in the block whose upper left corner is located at A7 and whose lower right corner is located at C12, and input the result in cell u max Function: Returns the greatest value contained in the range of specified cells.
  • Page 750 13-6-8 Using the Action Menu u mean Function: Returns the mean of the values contained in the range of specified cells. Syntax: mean(start cell:end cell[,start cell:end cell]) Example: To determine the mean of the values in the block whose upper left corner is located at A7 and whose lower right corner is located at C12, and input the result in cell A1: u median...
  • Page 751 13-6-9 Using the Action Menu u mode Function: Returns the mode of the values contained in the range of specified cells. Syntax: mode(start cell:end cell[,start cell:end cell]) Example: To determine the mode of the values in the block whose upper left corner is located at A7 and whose lower right corner is located at C12, and input the result in cell A1: u Q...
  • Page 752 13-6-10 Using the Action Menu u Q Function: Returns the third quartile of the values contained in the range of specified cells. Syntax: (start cell:end cell[,start cell:end cell]) Example: To determine the third quartile of the values in the block whose upper left corner is located at A7 and whose lower right corner is located at C12, and input the result in cell A1: u percentile...
  • Page 753 13-6-11 Using the Action Menu u List-Calculation - stdDev Function: Returns the sample standard deviation of the values contained in the range of specified cells. Syntax: stdDev(start cell:end cell) Example: To determine the sample standard deviation of the values in the block whose upper left corner is located at A7 and whose lower right corner is located at C12, and input the result in cell A1: u List-Calculation - variance...
  • Page 754 13-6-12 Using the Action Menu u List-Calculation - sum Function: Returns the sum of the values contained in the range of specified cells. Syntax: sum(start cell:end cell[,start cell:end cell]) Example: To determine the sum of the values in the block whose upper left corner is located at A7 and whose lower right corner is located at C12, and input the result in cell A1: u List-Calculation - prod...
  • Page 755 13-6-13 Using the Action Menu u List-Calculation - cuml Function: Returns the cumulative sums of the values contained in the range of specified cells. Syntax: cuml(start cell:end cell) Example: To determine the cumulative sums of the values in cells B1 through B3, and input the result in cell A1: u List-Calculation - A list Function: Returns the differences between values in each of the adjacent cells in the range...
  • Page 756 13-6-14 Using the Action Menu u List-Calculation - percent Function: Returns the percentage of each value in the range of specified cells, the sum of which is 100%. Syntax: percent(start cell:end cell) Example: To determine the percentage of the values in cells B1 through B4, and input the result in cell A1: u List-Calculation - polyEval Function: Returns a polynomial arranged in descending order.
  • Page 757 13-6-15 Using the Action Menu • “ ” is the default variable when you do not specify one above. • To specify “ ” as the variable, for example, enter “=polyEval(B1:B3, )”. u List-Calculation - sequence Function: Returns the lowest-degree polynomial that generates the sequence expressed by the values in a list or range of specified cells.
  • Page 758 13-6-16 Using the Action Menu u List-Calculation - sumSeq Function: Determines the lowest-degree polynomial that generates the sum of the first terms of your sequence. If we evaluate the resulting polynomial at 1, for example, the result will be the first value in your list. If we evaluate the resulting polynomial at 2, the result will be the sum of the first two values in your list.
  • Page 759: Formatting Cells And Data

    13-7-1 Formatting Cells and Data 13-7 Formatting Cells and Data This section explains how to control the format of the spreadsheet and the data contained in the cells. Standard (Fractional) and Decimal (Approximate) Modes You can use the following procedure to control whether a specific cell, row, or column, or the entire spreadsheet should use the standard mode (fractional format) or decimal mode (approximate value).
  • Page 760: Text Alignment

    13-7-2 Formatting Cells and Data Text Alignment With the following procedure, you can specify justified, align left, center, or align right for a specific cell, row, or column, or the entire spreadsheet. u ClassPad Operation (1) Select the cell(s) whose alignment setting you want to specify. •...
  • Page 761: Changing The Width Of A Column

    13-7-3 Formatting Cells and Data Changing the Width of a Column There are three different methods you can use to control the width of a column: dragging with the stylus, using the [Column Width] command, or using the [AutoFit Selection] command. u To change the width of a column using the stylus Use the stylus to drag the edge of a column header left or right until it is the desired width. u To change the width of a column using the Column Width command (1) Tap any cell in the column whose width you want to change.
  • Page 762 13-7-4 Formatting Cells and Data (3) On the dialog box that appears, enter a value in the [Width] box to specify the desired width of the column in pixels. • You can also use the [Range] box to specify a different column from the one you selected in step (1) above, or a range of columns.
  • Page 763 13-7-5 Formatting Cells and Data (3) On the [Edit] menu, tap [AutoFit Selection]. • This causes the column width to be adjusted automatically so the entire value can be displayed. • Note that [AutoFit Selection] also will reduce the width of a column, if applicable. The following shows what happens when [AutoFit Selection] is executed while a cell that contains a single digit is selected.
  • Page 764: Graphing

    13-8-1 Graphing 13-8 Graphing The Spreadsheet application lets you draw a variety of different graphs for analyzing data. You can combine line and column graphs, and the interactive editing feature lets you change a graph by dragging its points on the display. Graph Menu After selecting data on the spreadsheet, use the [Graph] menu to select the type of graph you want to draw.
  • Page 765 13-8-2 Graphing u [Graph] - [Line] - [Clustered] ( D ) u [Graph] - [Line] - [Stacked] ( F ) 20060301...
  • Page 766 13-8-3 Graphing u [Graph] - [Line] - [100% Stacked] ( G ) u [Graph] - [Column] - [Clustered] ( H ) 20060301...
  • Page 767 13-8-4 Graphing u [Graph] - [Column] - [Stacked] ( J ) u [Graph] - [Column] - [100% Stacked] ( K ) 20060301...
  • Page 768 13-8-5 Graphing u [Graph] - [Bar] - [Clustered] ( L ) u [Graph] - [Bar] - [Stacked] ( : ) 20060301...
  • Page 769 13-8-6 Graphing u [Graph] - [Bar] - [100% Stacked] ( " ) u [Graph] - [Pie] ( Z ) • When you select a pie chart, only the first series (row or column) of the selected data is used. • Tapping any of the sections of a pie graph causes three values to appear at the bottom of the screen: the cell location, a data value for the section, and a percent value that indicates the portion of the total data that the data value represents.
  • Page 770 13-8-7 Graphing u [Graph] - [Scatter] ( X ) • In the case of a scatter graph, the first series (column or row) of selected values is used as the -values for all plots. The other selected values are used as the -value for each of the plots.
  • Page 771 13-8-8 Graphing • Tapping any of the bins of a histogram graph causes three values to appear at the bottom of the screen. The first two values (from the left) indicate the range of the selected bin, while the third value indicates the quantity of the selected bin.
  • Page 772 13-8-9 Graphing • Tapping the Q1, Q3, Med, Min, or Max location of a box whisker graph will cause the applicable value to appear at the bottom of the screen. • On the Graph window, checking [Series] - [Show Outliers] displays outliers instead of whiskers on graph.
  • Page 773 13-8-10 Graphing u [Graph] - [Row Series] Selecting this option treats each row as a set of data. The value in each column is plotted as a vertical axis value. The following shows a graph of the same data as the above example, except this time [Row Series] is selected.
  • Page 774: Graph Window Menus And Toolbar

    13-8-11 Graphing Graph Window Menus and Toolbar The following describes the special menus and toolbar that appears whenever the Spreadsheet application Graph window is on the display. k O Menu • See “Using the O Menu” on page 1-5-4. k Edit Menu • See “Edit Menu” on page 13-2-2. k View Menu Many of the [View] menu commands can also be executed by tapping Spreadsheet application Graph window toolbar buttons.
  • Page 775 13-8-12 Graphing k Type Menu • The [Type] menu is identical to the [Graph] menu described on page 13-8-1. k Series Menu All of the [Series] menu commands can also be executed by tapping a Graph window toolbar button. • All of the [Series] menu operations are available only when there is a clustered line graph or a clustered column graph on the Graph window.
  • Page 776: Basic Graphing Steps

    13-8-13 Graphing Basic Graphing Steps The following are the basic steps for graphing spreadsheet data. u ClassPad Operation (1) Input the data you want to graph into the spreadsheet. (2) Use the [Graph] menu to specify whether you want to graph the data by row or by column.
  • Page 777 13-8-14 Graphing (4) On the [Graph] menu, select the type of graph you want to draw. Or you can tap the applicable icon on the toolbar. • This draws the selected graph. See “Graph Menu” on page 13-8-1 for examples of the different types of graphs that are available.
  • Page 778: Other Graph Window Operations

    13-8-15 Graphing Other Graph Window Operations This section provides more details about the types of operations you can perform while the Graph window is on the display. u To show or hide lines and markers (1) While a line graph or a scatter graph is on the Graph window, tap the [View] menu. Lines and markers both turned on (2) Tap the [Markers] or [Lines] item to toggle it between show (checkbox selected) and hide (checkbox cleared).
  • Page 779 13-8-16 Graphing u To change a line in a clustered line graph to a column graph (1) Draw the clustered line graph. (2) With the stylus, tap any data point on the line you wish to change to a column graph. (3) On the [Series] menu, tap [Column].
  • Page 780 13-8-17 Graphing u To change a column in a clustered column graph to a line (1) Draw the clustered column graph. (2) With the stylus, tap any one of the columns you wish to change to a line graph. (3) On the [Series] menu, tap [Line]. •...
  • Page 781 13-8-18 Graphing u To display a regression curve (1) Draw a clustered line graph or clustered column graph. • A regression curve can be drawn for a line, column, or scatter graph only. • The above shows a stacked line graph. (2) With the stylus, tap any point of the data for which you want to draw the regression curve.
  • Page 782 13-8-19 Graphing • This causes the applicable regression curve to appear in the Graph window. • Tapping the regression curve selects it and displays its equation in the status bar. • You can drag and drop the regression curve to a cell or the edit box in the Spreadsheet window.
  • Page 783 13-8-20 Graphing u To find out the percentage of data for each pie graph section (1) While the display is split between the pie graph and the Spreadsheet windows, tap the pie graph to select it. (2) On the [Edit] menu, tap [Copy]. (3) Tap the Spreadsheet window to make it active.
  • Page 784 13-8-21 Graphing u To change the appearance of the axes While a graph is on the Graph window, select [Toggle Axes] on the [View] menu or tap the → q toolbar button to cycle through axes settings in the following sequence: axes on axes → → and values on axes and values off u To change the appearance of a graph by dragging a point...
  • Page 785 13-8-22 Graphing • If a regression curve is displayed for the data whose graph is being changed by dragging, the regression curve also changes automatically in accordance with the drag changes. • When you edit data in the spreadsheet and press E, your graph will update automatically. Important! • You can drag a point only if it corresponds to a fixed value on the spreadsheet. You cannot drag a point if it corresponds to a formula. • You may encounter the message “Insufficient System Memory to Run...” if you are using a large amount of data and formulas. 20060301 20070301...
  • Page 786: Chapter 14 Using The Differential Equation Graph Application

    Chapter Using the Differential Equation Graph Application This chapter explains how to use the Differential Equation Graph application, which you can use to investigate families of solutions to ordinary differential equations (ODE). 14-1 Differential Equation Graph Application Overview 14-2 Graphing a First Order Differential Equation 14-3 Graphing a Second Order Differential Equation 14-4 Graphing an Nth-order Differential Equation 14-5 Drawing f ( x ) Type Function Graphs and Parametric...
  • Page 787: Differential Equation Graph Application Overview

    14-1-1 Differential Equation Graph Application Overview 14-1 Differential Equation Graph Application Overview This section explains how to use the Differential Equation Graph application screen, and describes the basic configuration of the Differential Equation Graph application windows. Differential Equation Graph Application Features You can use the Differential Equation Graph application to draw the following types of graphs.
  • Page 788: Starting Up The Differential Equation Graph Application

    14-1-2 Differential Equation Graph Application Overview Starting Up the Differential Equation Graph Application Use the following procedure to start up the Differential Equation Graph application. u ClassPad Operation On the application menu, tap This starts the Differential Equation Graph application and displays the Differential Equation Editor window and the Differential Equation Graph window.
  • Page 789 14-1-3 Differential Equation Graph Application Overview k Differential Equation Editor Window Screens The Differential Equation Editor window has three different editor screens. The editor screen you should use depends on what you want to input, as described below. Differential equation editor Initial condition editor General graph editor ([DiffEq] tab)
  • Page 790: Differential Equation Editor Window Menus And Buttons

    14-1-4 Differential Equation Graph Application Overview Differential Equation Editor Window Menus and Buttons This section provides basic information about Differential Equation Editor window menus and commands. • For information about the O menu, see “Using the O Menu” on page 1-5-4. Edit Menu ([DiffEq], [IC], [Graphs]) Select this Edit menu To do this:...
  • Page 791 14-1-5 Differential Equation Graph Application Overview Toolbar Buttons ([DiffEq], [IC], [Graphs]) To do this: Tap this button: Graph the selected function(s) Display the View Window dialog box to configure Differential Equation Graph window settings Display the Main application window Delete the line of data at the current cursor location Toolbar Buttons ([DiffEq]) To input this: Tap this button:...
  • Page 792: Differential Equation Graph Window Menus And Buttons

    14-1-6 Differential Equation Graph Application Overview Differential Equation Graph Window Menus and Buttons This section provides basic information about Differential Equation Graph window menus and commands. Edit Menu Select this Edit menu To do this: item: Toggle arrows to indicate the direction of slope field or phase Arrows plane vectors on and off Toggle the use of unit vectors for slope field or phase plane...
  • Page 793 14-1-7 Differential Equation Graph Application Overview Analysis Menu Select this Analysis To do this: menu item: Pan the graph window Select and move initial condition point Select Trace the graph of a solution curve Trace Register the coordinates at the location you tap on the Differential Equation Graph window as the initial condition, and Modify graph the solution curve based on that initial condition...
  • Page 794: Differential Equation Graph Application Status Bar

    14-1-8 Differential Equation Graph Application Overview Differential Equation Graph Application Status Bar The status bar at the bottom of the Differential Equation Graph application shows the current angle unit setting and [Complex Format] setting (page 1-9-5). Angle unit Real mode If you see this: It means this: The angle unit setting is radians.
  • Page 795: Graphing A First Order Differential Equation

    14-2-1 Graphing a First Order Differential Equation 14-2 Graphing a First Order Differential Equation This section explains how to input a first order differential equation and draw a slope field, and how to graph the solution curve(s) of a first order differential equation based on given initial conditions.
  • Page 796 14-2-2 Graphing a First Order Differential Equation (5) Tap O . • This draws the slope field of y ’ = y – x . (6) Tap 6 , or tap O and then tap [View Window] to display the View Window dialog box, and configure the View Window settings as shown below. • For details about View Window settings, see “Configuring Differential Equation Graph View Window Parameters” on page 14-6-1. (7) After the settings are the way you want, tap [OK]. • This updates the slope field in accordance with the new View Window settings. [Edit] - [Redraw] 20060301...
  • Page 797: Inputting Initial Conditions And Graphing The Solution Curves Of A First Order Differential Equation

    14-2-3 Graphing a First Order Differential Equation Inputting Initial Conditions and Graphing the Solution Curves of a First Order Differential Equation You can use the procedure in this section to overlay, onto the slope field, solution curves of the first order differential equation input on the [DiffEq] tab for given initial conditions. Example: To input the first order differential equation y ’...
  • Page 798: Configuring Solution Curve Graph Settings

    14-2-4 Graphing a First Order Differential Equation Configuring Solution Curve Graph Settings You can specify whether or not a solution curve should be drawn for each initial condition input on the initial condition editor. You can also specify either a normal or thick line for solution curves.
  • Page 799 14-2-5 Graphing a First Order Differential Equation (2) Tap the down arrow button on the toolbar. (3) Tap F on the toolbar to draw the solution curve with a thin line, or G to draw with a thick line. (4) To apply your setting to the graph, tap O . 20060301...
  • Page 800: Graphing A Second Order Differential Equation

    14-3-1 Graphing a Second Order Differential Equation 14-3 Graphing a Second Order Differential Equation This section explains how to input a second order differential equation and draw a slope field, and how to graph the solution curve(s) for a second order differential equation based on given initial conditions.
  • Page 801: Inputting Initial Conditions And Graphing The Solution Curve Of A Second Order Differential Equation

    14-3-2 Graphing a Second Order Differential Equation (4) Tap O . • This draws the phase plane of x ’ = x , y ’ = − y . [Edit] - [Redraw] Inputting Initial Conditions and Graphing the Solution Curve of a Second Order Differential Equation You can use the procedure in this section to overlay, onto the slope field, solution curve of the second order differential equation input on the [DiffEq] tab for given initial conditions.
  • Page 802 14-3-3 Graphing a Second Order Differential Equation (4) Tap O . • This graphs the solution curve and overlays it on the phase plane of { x ’ = x , y ’ = − y }. [Edit] - [Redraw] •...
  • Page 803: Graphing An Nth-Order Differential Equation

    14-4-1 Graphing an Nth-order Differential Equation 14-4 Graphing an Nth-order Differential Equation This section explains how to graph the solution curve(s) for an nth order (higher order) differential equation based on specified initial conditions. With this application, an nth order differential equation is input in the form of a set of multiple first order differential equations.
  • Page 804 14-4-2 Graphing an Nth-order Differential Equation (5) Use the initial condition editor to input ( xi , y 1 i , y 2 i ) = (0, −1, 0), (0, 0, 0), (0, 1, 0). awybwaw awawaw awbwaw (Tapping r on this screen will cause the initial condition editor to fill the entire window.) (6) Tap O .
  • Page 805: Drawing F (X) Type Function Graphs And Parametric Function Graphs

    14-5-1 Drawing f (x) Type Function Graphs and Parametric Function Graphs 14-5 Drawing f ( x ) Type Function Graphs and Parametric Function Graphs You can use the Differential Equation Graph application to graph f ( x ) type function graphs and parametric function graphs, the same way as you do with the Graph &...
  • Page 806: Drawing A Parametric Function Graph

    14-5-2 Drawing f (x) Type Function Graphs and Parametric Function Graphs Drawing a Parametric Function Graph Example: To graph { xt = 3sin( t ) + 1, yt = 3cos( t ) + 1} and { xt = sin( t ) − 1, yt = cos( t ) − 1} (Angle Unit Setting: radian, 0 <...
  • Page 807: Configuring Differential Equation Graph View Window Parameters

    14-6-1 Configuring Differential Equation Graph View Window Parameters 14-6 Configuring Differential Equation Graph View Window Parameters You can set the x - and y -axis window settings, as well as a number of other general graphing parameters on the View Window dialog box. This dialog box contains two tabs. The first tab lets you set the window values and steps used for graphing a field.
  • Page 808: Differential Equation Graph View Window Parameters

    14-6-2 Configuring Differential Equation Graph View Window Parameters Differential Equation Graph View Window Parameters k Window Tab Setting Description x min minimum value along the (horizontal) x -axis x max maximum value along the (horizontal) x -axis y min minimum value along the (vertical) y -axis y max maximum value along the (vertical) y -axis Field...
  • Page 809 14-6-3 Configuring Differential Equation Graph View Window Parameters k Solutions Tab Setting Description A solution curve is graphed starting at the initial condition value t 0 and Solution Dir. continues until it reaches a target value, which can be either t min or t max.
  • Page 810: Differential Equation Graph Window Operations

    14-7-1 Differential Equation Graph Window Operations 14-7 Differential Equation Graph Window Operations You can perform the following operations on the Differential Equation Graph window. • Graph zooming and scrolling • Modification of initial conditions (shifting the initial condition coordinates by dragging it) •...
  • Page 811 14-7-2 Differential Equation Graph Window Operations (1) Perform the operation under “Inputting an Nth-order Differential Equation and Initial Conditions, and then Graphing the Solutions” on page 14-4-1. • Performing all of the steps will produce a graph like the one shown below to appear on the Differential Equation Graph window. These dots are the currently configured initial conditions. (2) Tap [Analysis] - [Select] or the toolbar G button. (3) Tap one of the initial condition dots to select it. • Here we will tap the bottom dot, which is the Initial Condition 1 setting ( xi , y 1 i , y 2 i ) = (0, −1, 0). The dot you tap becomes a white circle (  ), which indicates that it is selected. (4) Use the stylus to drag the dot to another location. • The applicable initial location will change to the coordinates of the location where you release the stylus after dragging the dot. After modifying an initial condition, the solution will be redrawn accordingly. 20060301...
  • Page 812 14-7-3 Differential Equation Graph Window Operations u To configure new initial conditions on the Differential Equation Graph window Example: After drawing the slope field of a first order differential equation, to configure initial condition settings on the Differential Equation Graph window (1) Perform the operation under “Inputting a First Order Differential Equation and Drawing a Slope Field”...
  • Page 813 14-7-4 Differential Equation Graph Window Operations • After the solution curve is drawn, J button highlighting turns off, and the G button becomes highlighted. At this time, you can change the initial   condition by tapping the dot that represents it and dragging the dot to a different location.
  • Page 814: Using Trace To Read Graph Coordinates

    14-7-5 Differential Equation Graph Window Operations Using Trace to Read Graph Coordinates The following three types of trace operations are available for reading graph coordinates. Point Trace Displays a trace cursor that can be positioned on any x , y coordinate. This trace cursor can be moved freely on the screen with either the stylus or cursor keys.
  • Page 815: Graphing An Expression Or Value By Dropping It Into The Differential Equation Graph Window

    14-7-6 Differential Equation Graph Window Operations (3) To move the cross cursor to another field line, tap the destination on the Differential Equation Graph window or use the cursor keys. • The coordinates in the status bar will change whenever the crosshair pointer is moved.
  • Page 816 14-7-7 Differential Equation Graph Window Operations Drop this type of expression or value into the To draw this type of graph: Differential Equation Graph window: 1st-order differential equation in the form of y' = f ( x , y ) Slope field Solution curve(s) of a 1st-order Matrix of initial conditions in the following form:...
  • Page 817 14-7-8 Differential Equation Graph Window Operations (4) Drag the stylus across “ y ’ = exp( x ) + x ” on the eActivity application window to select it. (5) Drag the selected expression to the Differential Equation Graph window. •...
  • Page 818 14-7-9 Differential Equation Graph Window Operations u To graph the solution curves by dropping an Nth-order differential equation and matrix into the Differential Equation Graph window Example: To drag the Nth-order differential equation y ” + y ’ = exp( x ) and then the initial condition matrix [[0, 1, 0][0, 2, 0]] from the eActivity application window to the Differential Equation Graph window, and graph the applicable solution curves (1) On the application menu, tap A.
  • Page 819 14-7-10 Differential Equation Graph Window Operations (5) Drag the selected expression to the Differential Equation Graph window. • This registers y ” + y ’ = exp( x ) on the differential equation editor ([DiffEq] tab). The Differential Equation Graph window contents do not change at this time. (6) Drag the stylus across “[[0,1,0][0,2,0]]”...
  • Page 820: Chapter 15 Using The Financial Application

    Chapter Using the Financial Application This chapter explains how to use the Financial application. You can use the Financial application to perform a variety of financial calculations. 15-1 Financial Application Overview 15-2 Simple Interest 15-3 Compound Interest 15-4 Cash Flow 15-5 Amortization 15-6 Interest Conversion 15-7 Cost/Sell/Margin...
  • Page 821: Financial Application Overview

    15-1-1 Financial Application Overview 15-1 Financial Application Overview This section explains how to use the Financial application initial screen, and describes the basic configuration of the Financial application windows. It also provides information on using the Financial application’s Help and Format features. Starting Up the Financial Application Use the following procedure to start up the Financial application.
  • Page 822: Financial Application Menus And Buttons

    15-1-2 Financial Application Overview Financial Application Menus and Buttons This section describes the basic configuration of Financial application windows, and provides basic information about its menus and commands. • For information about the O menu, see “Using the O Menu” on page 1-5-4. k Edit Menu To do this: Select this Edit menu item:...
  • Page 823 15-1-3 Financial Application Overview Select this Calculations To perform this type of calculation: menu item: Amount that a business expense can be offset by income Depreciation (depreciated) over a given year Purchase price or annual yield of a bond Bond Calculation Amount you must sell to break even or to obtain a specified Break-Even Point profit, as well as amount of profit or loss on particular sales...
  • Page 824: Configuring Default Financial Application Settings

    15-1-4 Financial Application Overview Configuring Default Financial Application Settings Most financial calculations require that you define certain general parameters that affect the results they produce. For example, you need to specify whether you use a 360-day or 365-day year, whether payments are made at the beginning of a period or end of a period, whether interest is compounded annually or semi-annually, etc.
  • Page 825: Financial Application Pages

    15-1-5 Financial Application Overview Financial Application Pages Selecting a calculation type from the Financial application Calculations menu will create and display a new “page”. Note the following rules that apply to Financial application pages. • You can scroll between pages using the toolbar and >...
  • Page 826: Financial Calculation Screen Basics

    15-1-6 Financial Application Overview Financial Calculation Screen Basics Each calculation has a unique screen format. This section provides general information that applies to the screens for all Financial application calculations. Input/calculation box Input values when required. For calculation, tap the button to the left of the box.
  • Page 827: Variables

    15-1-7 Financial Application Overview k Status Bar The status bar shows the settings that apply to the calculations on the currently active page. You can change the settings by tapping them on the status bar. If the cursor is in an input/calculation box, “Solve”...
  • Page 828: Simple Interest

    15-2-1 Simple Interest 15-2 Simple Interest Simple Interest lets you calculate interest (without compounding) based on the number of days money is invested. Simple Interest Fields The following fields appear on the Simple Interest calculation page. Field Description Days Number of days in investment period Annual interest rate (as a percent) Present value (initial investment) Calculates and displays simple interest...
  • Page 829: Calculation Formulas

    15-2-2 Simple Interest k Example 2 What is the simple interest ([SI]) on a principal amount of $10,000 (PV) invested or borrowed for 120 days (Days) at 5% per annum ( I %)? This indicates that the simple interest is $164.3835616. •...
  • Page 830: Compound Interest

    15-3-1 Compound Interest 15-3 Compound Interest Compound Interest lets you calculate interest based on compounding parameters you specify. Compound Interest Fields The following fields appear on the Compound Interest calculation page. Field Description Number of installment periods Annual interest rate (as a percent) Present value (initial investment) Amount paid each period Future value...
  • Page 831 15-3-2 Compound Interest k Example 2 If you deposit $100 into an account that earns 7% compounded monthly, how much will be in the account after three years? k Example 3 What will be the value of an ordinary annuity at the end of 10 years if $100 is deposited each month into an account that earns 7% compounded monthly? 20060301...
  • Page 832: Calculation Formulas

    15-3-3 Compound Interest Calculation Formulas u PV, PMT, FV, n I % G 0 – × PMT – × FV α β PV = γ γ β – × PV – × FV PMT = α – × PV – γ...
  • Page 833: Cash Flow

    15-4-1 Cash Flow 15-4 Cash Flow Cash Flow lets you calculate the value of money paid out or received in varying amounts over time. Cash Flow Fields The following fields appear on the Cash Flow calculation page. Field Description Cash List of income or expenses (up to 80 entries) Annual interest rate (as a percent) Net present value...
  • Page 834 15-4-2 Cash Flow (4) On the dialog box that appears, make sure “list1” is selected for “List variables”, and then tap [OK]. • You can now use the list of values in cash flow calculation. • To close the Stat Editor window, tap anywhere in the Stat Editor window and then tap the close box ( S ) in the upper right corner of the screen.
  • Page 835 15-4-3 Cash Flow k Example 2 Suppose you were offered the investment in Example 1 at a cost of $1,000. What is the net present value (NPV) of the investment? What is the internal rate of return (IRR)? Note • When performing the calculations for Example 2, you need to enter the cost, as a negative value (–1000), in cell 1 of list1 in the stat editor.
  • Page 836: Calculation Formulas

    15-4-4 Cash Flow Calculation Formulas u NPV NPV = CF ..(1+ i ) (1+ i ) (1+ i ) (1+ i ) n : natural number up to 79 u NFV NFV = NPV × (1 + i ) u IRR IRR is calculated using Newton’s Method.
  • Page 837: Amortization

    15-5-1 Amortization 15-5 Amortization Amortization lets you calculate the interest and principal portions of a payment or payments. Amortization Fields The following fields appear on the Amortization calculation page. Field Description Number of first installment period in interval under consideration Number of last installment period in interval under consideration Annual interest rate (as a percent) Present value (initial investment)
  • Page 838 15-5-2 Amortization k Example 1 (Compound Interest) Use a Compound Interest page (page 15-3-1) to determine the monthly payment ([PMT]) on a 20-year (N = 20 × 12 = 240) mortgage with a loan amount (PV) of $100,000 at an annual rate ( I %) of 8.025%, compounded monthly (C/Y = 12).
  • Page 839 15-5-3 Amortization k Example 2 (Amortization) Use the monthly payment value you obtained in Example 1 (PMT = –837.9966279) to determine the following information for payment 10 (PM1) through 15 (PM2). As in Example 1, the mortgage has a loan amount (PV) of $100,000 at an annual rate ( I %) of 8.025%, compounded monthly (C/Y = 12) for 20 years.
  • Page 840: Calculation Formulas

    15-5-4 Amortization Calculation Formulas 1 payment 1 payment ..........Last ..........Last Number of Payments Number of Payments a : Interest portion of payment PM1 (INT) = I BAL × i I × (PMT sign) PM1–1 b : Principal portion of payment PM1 (PRN) ×...
  • Page 841: Interest Conversion

    15-6-1 Interest Conversion 15-6 Interest Conversion Interest Conversion lets you calculate the effective or nominal interest rate for interest that is compounded multiple times during a year. Interest Conversion Fields The following fields appear on the Interest Conversion calculation page. Field Description Number of times interest is compounded per year...
  • Page 842: Calculation Formulas

    15-6-2 Interest Conversion k Example 2 What is the nominal interest rate ([APR]) on a certificate that offers an annual effective interest rate ([EFF]) of 5%, compounded bi-monthly (N = 6)? • You can change any value and then tap a button to recalculate. Calculation Formulas APR/100 EFF =...
  • Page 843: Cost /Sell/Margin

    15-7-1 Cost /Sell/Margin 15-7 Cost /Sell/Margin Cost /Sell/Margin lets you calculate the cost, selling price, or margin of profit on an item, given the other two values. Cost /Sell/Margin Fields The following fields appear on the Cost/Sell/Margin calculation page. Field Description Cost Production cost...
  • Page 844: Day Count Fields

    15-8-1 Day Count 15-8 Day Count Day Count lets you calculate the number of days between two dates, or the date that is a specified number of days from another date. Day Count Fields The following fields appear on the Day Count calculation page. Field Description Month (1-12);...
  • Page 845 15-8-2 Day Count k Example 2 What date (d2) comes 150 days ([Days]) after June 11, 2005 (d1)? k Example 3 What date (d1) comes 44 days ([Days]) before March 3, 2005 (d2)? 20060301...
  • Page 846: Depreciation

    15-9-1 Depreciation 15-9 Depreciation Depreciation lets you calculate the amount that a business expense can be offset by income (depreciated) over a given year. You can use a Depreciation page to calculate depreciation using one of four methods: straight-line, fixed-percentage, sum-of-the-years’-digits, or declining-balance. Depreciation Fields The following fields appear on the Depreciation calculation page.
  • Page 847 15-9-2 Depreciation k Example 1 Use the sum-of-the-years’-digits method ([SYD]) to calculate the first year ( j = 1) of depreciation on an $12,000 (PV) computer, with a useful life (N) of five years. Use a depreciation ratio ( I %) of 25%, and assume that the computer can be depreciated for a full 12 months in the first year (YR1).
  • Page 848: Calculation Formulas

    15-9-3 Depreciation k Example 2 Now calculate the depreciation amount ([SYD]) for the second year ( j = 2). Note • You can also tap [SL] to calculate depreciation using straight-line method, [FP] using fixed- percentage method, or [DB] using declining-balance method. •...
  • Page 849 15-9-4 Depreciation k Fixed-Percentage Method = PV × × + FV ) × = (RDV j–1 = RDV (YR1G12) = PV – FV – FP = RDV – FP j–1 (YR1G12) k Sum-of-the-Years’-Digits Method n (n +1) n' = n – (Intg (n' ) +1) (Intg (n' )+2 × Frac(n' )) Z' = (PV –...
  • Page 850: Bond Calculation

    15-10-1 Bond Calculation 15-10 Bond Calculation Bond Calculation lets you calculate the purchase price or the annual yield of a bond. Bond Calculation Fields The following fields appear on the Bond Calculation page. Field Description Month (1-12); Day (1-31); Year (1902-2097) Month (1-12); Day (1-31); Year (1902-2097) Number of periods Redemption value Annual coupon rate...
  • Page 851 15-10-2 Bond Calculation k Example 1 You want to purchase a semiannual (Compounding Frequency = Semi-annual) corporate bond that matures on 12/15/2006 (d2) to settle on 6/1/2004 (d1). The bond is based on the 30/360 day-count method (Days in Year = 360 days) with a coupon rate (CPN) of 3%. The bond will be redeemed at 100% of its par value (RDV).
  • Page 852 15-10-3 Bond Calculation k Example 2 For the same type of bond described in Example 1, calculate the price on the bond (PRC) based on a specific number of coupon payments (Term). • Before performing the calculation, you should use the [Format] tab to change the [Bond Interval] setting to “Term”, or tap “Date”...
  • Page 853: Calculation Formulas

    15-10-4 Bond Calculation Calculation Formulas Redemption date (d2) Issue date Purchase date (d1) Coupon Payment dates PRC : price per $100 of face value CPN : coupon rate (%) YLD : annual yield (%) : accrued days : number of coupon payments per year (1 = Annual, 2 = Semi-annual) : number of coupon payments until maturity ( n is used when “Term”...
  • Page 854 15-10-5 Bond Calculation Bond Interval Setting: Term PRC = – – Σ YLD/100 YLD/100 INT = 0 CST = PRC u Annual Yield (YLD) YLD is calculated using Newton’s Method. Note • The Financial application performs annual yield (YLD) calculations using Newton’s Method, which produces approximate values whose precision can be affected by various calculation conditions.
  • Page 855: Break-Even Point

    15-11-1 Break-Even Point 15-11 Break-Even Point Break-Even Point lets you calculate the amount you must sell to break even or to obtain a specified profit, as well as the profit or loss on particular sales. Break-Even Point Fields The following fields appear on the Break-Even Point calculation page. Field Description Selling price per unit...
  • Page 856 15-11-2 Break-Even Point k Example 1 What is the break-even point sales amount ([SBE]) and sales quantity ([QBE]) required for a profit ([PRF]) of $400,000? Note • You need to calculate the break-even point sales quantity ([QBE]) before you will be able to calculate the break-even sales amount ([SBE]).
  • Page 857: Calculation Formulas

    15-11-3 Break-Even Point k Example 2 What is the break-even point sales amount ([SBE]) and sales quantity ([QBE]) to attain a profit ratio ([r%]) of 40%? • For this example, use the [Format] tab to change the [Profit Amount/Ratio] setting to “Ratio ( r %)”...
  • Page 858: Margin Of Safety

    15-12-1 Margin of Safety 15-12 Margin of Safety Margin of Safety lets you calculate how much sales can be reduced before losses are incurred. Margin of Safety Fields The following fields appear on the Margin of Safety calculation page. Field Description Amount obtained from sales Break-even sales (amount that must be obtained from sales to break even) Margin of safety (portion of sales amount above break-even point) k Example What is the margin of safety ([MOS]) when the sales amount ([SAL]) is $1,200,000 and the...
  • Page 859: Operating Leverage

    15-13-1 Operating Leverage 15-13 Operating Leverage Operating leverage lets you calculate the degree of change in net earnings arising from a change in sales amount. Operating Leverage Fields The following fields appear on the Operating Leverage calculation page. Field Description Amount currently obtained from sales Variable cost for this level of production Fixed costs Degree of operating leverage...
  • Page 860: Financial Leverage

    15-14-1 Financial Leverage 15-14 Financial Leverage Financial Leverage lets you calculate the degree of change in net earnings arising from a change in interest paid. Financial Leverage Fields The following fields appear on the Financial Leverage calculation page. Field Description EBIT Earnings before interest and taxes Interest to be paid to bondholders Degree of financial leverage k Example...
  • Page 861: Combined Leverage

    15-15-1 Combined Leverage 15-15 Combined Leverage Combined Leverage lets you calculate the combined effects of operation and financial leverages. Combined Leverage Fields The following fields appear on the Combined Leverage calculation page. Field Description Amount obtained from sales Variable cost for this level of production Fixed costs Interest to be paid to bondholders Degree of combined leverage...
  • Page 862: Quantity Conversion

    15-16-1 Quantity Conversion 15-16 Quantity Conversion Quantity Conversion lets you calculate the number of items sold, selling price, or sales amount given the other two values. It also lets you calculate the number of items manufactured, unit variable cost, or total variable cost given the other two values. Quantity Conversion Fields The following fields appear on the Quantity Conversion calculation page.
  • Page 863: Calculation Formulas

    15-16-2 Quantity Conversion k Example 2 Calculate the total variable costs of production (Manufacturing: [VC]) when the variable cost per unit ([VCU]) is $30 and the number of units manufactured ([QTY]) is 500. • You can also calculate the variable cost per unit ([VCU]) or number of units manufactured ([QTY]) by inputting the other two values and tapping the button for the result you want.
  • Page 864: Chapter 16 Configuring System Settings

    Chapter Configuring System Settings The ClassPad unit’s System application lets you configure global system settings and access system information. 16-1 System Setting Overview 16-2 Managing Memory Usage 16-3 Using the Reset Dialog Box 16-4 Initializing Your ClassPad 16-5 Adjusting Display Contrast 16-6 Configuring Power Properties 16-7 Specifying the Display Language 16-8 Specifying the Font Set...
  • Page 865: System Setting Overview

    16-1-1 System Setting Overview 16-1 System Setting Overview This section describes the configuration of the System application window, and provides information about its menus and commands. Starting Up the System Application Use the following procedure to start up the System application. u ClassPad Operation On the application menu, tap Y.
  • Page 866: System Application Menus And Buttons

    16-1-2 System Setting Overview System Application Menus and Buttons To perform an operation in the System application, select it on the [System] menu or tap the applicable toolbar button. Tap this Or select this System To do this: button: menu item: Reset the ClassPad unit (which deletes all variable and program data in main memory and all eActivity Reset...
  • Page 867: Managing Memory Usage

    16-2-1 Managing Memory Usage 16-2 Managing Memory Usage You can use [Memory Usage] to determine how much data is stored in the main memory and the storage area, and to delete data. [Memory Usage] appears first whenever you tap Y on the application menu to start up the System application.
  • Page 868 16-2-2 Managing Memory Usage This item: Shows how much memory is used by this type of data: Graph Summary Summary table data View Window 2-dimensional View Window parameter values 3D View Window 3-dimensional View Window parameter values Factor Zoom factor values Table Range values and table result values Conics Eqn...
  • Page 869: Deleting Memory Usage Data

    16-2-3 Managing Memory Usage Add-In App. Tab This sheet lists all of the add-in applications currently installed on your ClassPad, and shows the size of each application. eActivity Tab This sheet lists the names of all the files that have been created with the eActivity application, and shows the size of each file.
  • Page 870: Using The Reset Dialog Box

    16-3-1 Using the Reset Dialog Box 16-3 Using the Reset Dialog Box You can perform the following operations from the Reset dialog box. • Delete all variable and program data in main memory • Delete all eActivity data in storage memory u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap Y.
  • Page 871: Initializing Your Classpad

    16-4-1 Initializing Your ClassPad 16-4 Initializing Your ClassPad The initialization procedure provides you with a choice of two options. You can either clear the Flash ROM entire and return its data to the factory default state, or you can specify deletion of all user formulas and data, without deleting any currently installed add-in applications.
  • Page 872: Adjusting Display Contrast

    16-5-1 Adjusting Display Contrast 16-5 Adjusting Display Contrast Use the following procedure to display the Contrast dialog box and adjust display contrast. u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap Y. • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap Z to display the Contrast dialog box. (3) Adjust display contrast.
  • Page 873: Configuring Power Properties

    16-6-1 Configuring Power Properties 16-6 Configuring Power Properties Use the Power Properties dialog box to configure the power saving mode and auto power off (APO) settings. Power Saving Mode Your ClassPad has a “resume” feature that remembers its status when you turn it off, and restores the same status the next time you turn the ClassPad back on.
  • Page 874: Configuring Power Properties

    16-6-2 Configuring Power Properties Configuring Power Properties u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap Y. • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap X to display the Power Properties dialog box. (3) Configure the Power Save Mode and Auto Power Off settings. •...
  • Page 875: Specifying The Display Language

    16-7-1 Specifying the Display Language 16-7 Specifying the Display Language You can use the following procedure to specify German, English, Spanish, French, or Portuguese as the display language. u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap Y. • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap C to display the Language dialog box.
  • Page 876: Specifying The Font Set

    16-8-1 Specifying the Font Set 16-8 Specifying the Font Set You can select either “Regular” or “Bolder” as the display font type. Regular Bolder Text Input Menu u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap Y. • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap >...
  • Page 877: Specifying The Alphabetic Keyboard Arrangement

    16-9-1 Specifying the Alphabetic Keyboard Arrangement 16-9 Specifying the Alphabetic Keyboard Arrangement The Keyboard dialog box lets you select from among three different key arrangements for the alphabetic (abc) soft keyboard: QWERTY, AZERTY, or QWERTZ. The initial default setting is QWERTY. QWERTY AZERTY QWERTZ...
  • Page 878: Optimizing "Flash Rom

    Doing so can damage memory, resulting in loss of all memory contents and malfunction of your ClassPad. If this happens, you will need to request repair from your CASIO Maintenance Service Provider. Note that repair of your ClassPad will not recover any lost memory contents.
  • Page 879: Specifying The Ending Screen Image

    16-11-1 Specifying the Ending Screen Image 16-11 Specifying the Ending Screen Image Whenever you press the o key to turn off the ClassPad unit, it copies any data currently in RAM to Flash ROM, and then turns off power. The ending screen is what appears on the display while the RAM data save operation is being performed, until power is actually turned off.
  • Page 880: Adjusting Touch Panel Alignment

    16-12-1 Adjusting Touch Panel Alignment 16-12 Adjusting Touch Panel Alignment You should adjust touch panel alignment whenever you find that the wrong operation or no operation is performed when you tap the ClassPad screen. u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap Y. •...
  • Page 881: Viewing Version Information

    16-13-1 Viewing Version Information 16-13 Viewing Version Information Use the following procedure when you want to view version information about your ClassPad’s operating system. u To view software version information (1) On the application menu, tap Y. • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap > to display the Version dialog box. (3) To close the Version dialog box, tap [OK].
  • Page 882: Registering A User Name On A Classpad

    16-14-1 Registering a User Name on a ClassPad 16-14 Registering a User Name on a ClassPad You can register your name on your ClassPad so it appears at the bottom of the application menu screen. u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap Y. • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap [System] and then [ClassPad Name] to display the ClassPad Name dialog box. (3) Enter your name on the dialog box. (4) Tap [Set] to register your name or [Cancel] to cancel. 20060301 20070301...
  • Page 883: Specifying The Complex Number Imaginary Unit

    16-15-1 Specifying the Complex Number Imaginary Unit 16-15 Specifying the Complex Number Imaginary Unit In mathematics, the imaginary unit i allows the real number system R to be extended to the complex number system C. In electrical engineering and related fields, the imaginary unit is often written as j to avoid confusion with a changing current, traditionally denoted by i.
  • Page 884: Assigning Shift Mode Key Operations To Hard Keys

    16-16-1 Assigning Shift Mode Key Operations to Hard Keys 16-16 Assigning Shift Mode Key Operations to Hard Keys You can configure your ClassPad so the z key functions as a shift key, and assign shift mode key operations (such as character strings or function names, or operations) to the hard keys.
  • Page 885 16-16-2 Assigning Shift Mode Key Operations to Hard Keys • To assign the Cut, Copy, or Paste operation, tap the applicable button on the dialog box. • To clear the current assignment from the hard key, tap [Clear Assignment]. (6) After all the settings are the way you want, tap [OK] to apply them and close the Shift Key Assign dialog box.
  • Page 886: Chapter 17 Performing Data Communication

    Performing Data Communication You can use the SB-62 data communication cable to connect your ClassPad to another ClassPad unit or to a CASIO Data Analyzer, and transfer data between them. To transfer data between a ClassPad and a personal computer, you need to use the special USB cable that comes with ClassPad.
  • Page 887: Data Communication Overview

    Doing so can damage memory, resulting in loss of all memory contents and malfunction of your ClassPad. If this happens, you will need to request repair from your CASIO Maintenance Service Provider. Note that repair of your ClassPad will not recover any lost memory contents.
  • Page 888 On the ClassPad, use the Communication application. On your computer, use FA-CP1. For details, see the FA-CP1 User’s Guide. k Connecting a ClassPad to a CASIO EA-200 Data Analyzer You can perform the following operations when connected to a Data Analyzer.
  • Page 889: Using The Classpad Communication Application

    17-1-3 Data Communication Overview u How to Transfer Data Use the “Send38k” and “Receive38k” program commands to transfer data. For details, see “Chapter 12 – Using the Program Application”, and the user documentation that comes with the Data Analyzer. Using the ClassPad Communication Application To perform a data transfer operation, tap B on the application menu to start up the Communication application.
  • Page 890: Connecting The Classpad To Another Device

    17-2 Connecting the ClassPad to Another Device This section provides detailed explanations about how to connect the ClassPad to another ClassPad unit, to a computer, and to a CASIO Data Analyzer. Connecting to Another ClassPad Unit Use the procedure below to connect two ClassPad units.
  • Page 891: Connecting To An Ea-200 Data Analyzer

    Connecting the ClassPad to Another Device Connecting to an EA-200 Data Analyzer You can use the CASIO Data Analyzer to sample and collect data on various everyday natural phenomena. You can also connect the Data Analyzer to your ClassPad, and control Data Analyzer operation from your ClassPad.
  • Page 892: Connecting To A Computer (Usb)

    17-2-3 Connecting the ClassPad to Another Device Connecting to a Computer (USB) By running FA-CP1 software that comes with ClassPad on your computer, you can transfer ClassPad data to your computer. See the FA-CP1 User’s Guide for information about how to use it. •...
  • Page 893: Configuring Communication Parameters

    17-3-1 Configuring Communication Parameters 17-3 Configuring Communication Parameters Before trying to transfer data with the ClassPad, you should perform the procedures described in this section to configure its data communication parameters. u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap B. •...
  • Page 894: Wakeup

    17-3-2 Configuring Communication Parameters u Speed (3Pin) To specify this data rate for 3-pin communication: Select this setting: 9600 bps 9600 bps 38400 bps 38400 bps 115200 bps 115200 bps* The above setting specifies the data rate when connected to another ClassPad, or a Data Analyzer.
  • Page 895 17-3-3 Configuring Communication Parameters k When connected to a computer’s USB port Wakeup activates as soon as you connect the cable to the ClassPad, and the ClassPad automatically performs the following steps. (1) If the ClassPad is off when the cable is connected, it turns on. (2) The currently running application is exited, and the Communication application starts up.
  • Page 896: Transferring Data To Another Classpad Unit

    17-4-1 Transferring Data to Another ClassPad Unit 17-4 Transferring Data to Another ClassPad Unit This section details the steps you should perform in order to transfer data from one ClassPad unit to another. u ClassPad Operation (1) Use the procedure under “Connecting to Another ClassPad Unit” on page 17-2-1 to connect the two units.
  • Page 897 17-4-2 Transferring Data to Another ClassPad Unit Sender (6) In response to the confirmation message that appears, tap [OK] to send the data or [Cancel] to cancel the send operation. • Sender Tapping [OK] sends the data you selected in step (4). •...
  • Page 898: Selecting Data For Transfer

    17-4-3 Transferring Data to Another ClassPad Unit Selecting Data for Transfer Perform the following steps on the sending device to select the data you want to send in step (3) of the procedure on page 17-4-1. u ClassPad Operation (1) In the Communication application, tap [Link] and then [Transmit], or tap E to display the Select Data dialog box.
  • Page 899 17-4-4 Transferring Data to Another ClassPad Unit Data Folder List Tap “Presystm” to highlight it, and then tap it again. This lists the variables contained in the “Presystm” folder. eActivity Folder List Tap “e-Act2”. This lists the data contained in the “e-Act2” folder. •...
  • Page 900: Sending A Screenshot Of The Current Display Contents

    17-4-5 Transferring Data to Another ClassPad Unit Sending a Screenshot of the Current Display Contents Use the following procedure to send the current display contents of your ClassPad to another ClassPad unit. Important! Screenshot transfer is disabled when either of the following conditions exists. •...
  • Page 901: Communication Standby

    17-4-6 Transferring Data to Another ClassPad Unit Communication Standby The ClassPad enters “communication standby” when you perform a send or receive operation. While in communication standby, the ClassPad waits for the other unit to send data, or for it to get ready to receive data. The following describes how communication standby affects certain ClassPad operations.
  • Page 902: Appendix

    Appendix 1  Resetting and Initializing the ClassPad 2  Deleting an Application 3  Power Supply 4  Number of Digits and Precision 5  Specifications 6  Character Code Table 7  System Variable Table 8  Command and Function Index 9  Graph Types and Executable Functions 10  Error Message Table α 20060301...
  • Page 903: Resetting And Initializing The Classpad

    α -1-1 Resetting and Initializing the ClassPad 1  Resetting and Initializing the ClassPad  The memory of your ClassPad is divided into three parts: main memory, a storage area for storing data, and a RAM area for executing various calculations and operations. Reset and initialize restore normal ClassPad operation after some problem occurs. RAM Reset ...
  • Page 904 α -1-2 Resetting and Initializing the ClassPad k  Performing the RAM Reset Operation  You should perform the RAM reset operation whenever your ClassPad freezes up or when it begins to operate abnormally for some reason. The RAM reset operation should restore normal ClassPad operation. Important! •...
  • Page 905: Deleting An Application

    α -2-1 Deleting an Application 2  Deleting an Application You can delete an add-in application by deleting it from the application menu or by using the System application as described in Chapter 16. [Add-In App.] Memory Usage sheet of The following procedure shows how to delete an add-in application from the application menu only.
  • Page 906: Power Supply

    -3-1 Power Supply 3 Power Supply Your ClassPad is powered by four AAA-size batteries LR03 (AM4). The battery level indicator is displayed in the status bar......full ..... medium ....... low Important! • Be sure to replace batteries as soon as possible whenever the battery level indicator shows (medium).
  • Page 907 α -3-2 Power Supply k  Replacing Batteries Precautions: Incorrectly using batteries can cause them to burst or leak, possibly damaging the interior of the ClassPad. Note the following precautions: • Be sure that the positive (+) and negative (–) poles of each battery are facing in the proper directions.
  • Page 908 α -3-3 Power Supply (3) Remove the battery cover from the ClassPad by pulling with your finger at the point marked 1 . (4) Remove the four old batteries. (5) Load a new set of four batteries, making sure that their positive (+) and negative (–) ends are facing in the proper directions.
  • Page 909 α -3-4 Power Supply (9) Adjust the display contrast. a. Tap the button to make contrast darker, or the button to make it lighter. b. After the contrast setting is the way you want, tap [Set]. • Tapping [Initial] on the Contrast dialog box returns contrast to its initial factory default setting. (10) Specify the display language. a. On the list that appears, tap the language you want to use. • You can select German, English, Spanish, French, or Portuguese. b. When the language you want is selected, tap [Set]. • Tapping [Cancel] selects English and advances to the next dialog box. (11) Specify the soft keyboard key arrangement. a. On the list that appears, tap the key arrangement you want to use. b. When the key arrangement you want is selected, tap [Set]. • Tapping [Cancel] selects QWERTY arrangement and advances to the next dialog box. (12) Specify the font set. a. On the list that appears, tap the font set you want to use. • You can select Regular or Bolder. b. When the font set you want is selected, tap [Set]. • Tapping [Cancel] selects Bolder and advances to the next dialog box. 20060301 20070301...
  • Page 910 α -3-5 Power Supply (13) Configure power properties. a. Configure the Power Save Mode and Auto Power Off settings. • See “Power Saving Mode” and “Auto Power Off” on page16-6-1 for details about these settings. b. When the configurations are the way you want, tap [Set].
  • Page 911: Number Of Digits And Precision

    α -4-1 Number of Digits and Precision 4  Number of Digits and Precision k  Number of Digits  Standard Mode  The following applies when the check box next to the “Decimal Calculation” item on the Basic Format dialog box is not selected. • Up to 611 digits are stored in memory for integer values. •...
  • Page 912: Specifications

    α -5-1 Specifications 5  Specifications Calculation range: ± 1 × 10 to ± 9.999999999 × 10 –999 and 0. Internal operations use 15-digit mantissa. –2 Exponential display range:  Normal 1:  10 > | |, | | > 10 –9     Normal 2:  10 >...
  • Page 913 α -5-2 Specifications Data Communication Port: 3-pin data communication port 4-pin mini USB port • For information about FA-CP1 minimum computer system requirements, see the FA-CP1 User’s Guide. Method: Start-stop (asynchronous), full-duplex Transmission speed (BPS): 115200/38400/9600 bits/second (normal) 38400 bits/second (Send38k/Receive38k) Parity: None Bit length: 8 bits Stop bit: Send38k: 2 bits Receive38k: 1 bit Flow control: X ON 20060301 20070301...
  • Page 914: Character Code Table

    α -6-1 Character Code Table 6 Character Code Table Characters from character code 257 onwards are 2-byte characters. 32 48 64 80 96 112 33 49 65 81 97 113 34 50 66 82 98 114 35 51 67 83 99 115 36 52 68 84 100 116 37 53 69 85 101...
  • Page 915 α -6-2 Character Code Table 335 358 381 404 427 487 336 359 382 405 428 488 337 360 383 406 429 489 338 361 384 407 430 490 339 362 385 408 431 491 340 363 386 409 432 496 341 364...
  • Page 916 α -6-3 Character Code Table 579 604 629 654 679 741 580 605 630 655 680 742 581 606 631 656 681 743 582 607 632 657 682 744 583 608 633 658 683 745 584 609 634 659 684 746 585 610...
  • Page 917 α -6-4 Character Code Table 823 844 864 884 904 924 824 845 865 885 905 925 825 846 866 886 906 926 826 847 867 887 907 927 827 848 868 888 908 928 828 849 869 889 909 929 829 850...
  • Page 918: System Variable Table

    α -7-1 System Variable Table 7 System Variable Table : Possible –: Not possible <blank>: No default  Name Description Input Delete Data Type Default Sequence Variable – EXPR (Real Number)  Sequence Variable – EXPR (Real Number)  Sequence Variable – EXPR (Real Number) ...
  • Page 919 α -7-2 System Variable Table Name Description Input Delete Data Type Default Sequence Expression   Recursion Internal Variable – – EXPR (Real Number) Start Sequence Variable – EXPR (Real Number)  Sequence Variable – EXPR (Real Number)  Sequence Variable –...
  • Page 920 α -7-3 System Variable Table Name Description Input Delete Data Type Default Graph Transformation Vertical Start GconHStart – – EXPR (Real Number) Point Graph Transformation Vertical Step GconHStep – – EXPR (Real Number) Value Graph Transformation Horizontal End GconWEnd – –...
  • Page 921 α -7-4 System Variable Table Name Description Input Delete Data Type Default Frequency of Mode Values ModeFStat – – EXPR (Real Number) (Statistics Calculation) Number of Mode Values ModeNStat – – EXPR (Real Number) (Statistics Calculation) ModeStat Mode Value (Statistics Calculation) –...
  • Page 922 α -7-5 System Variable Table Name Description Input Delete Data Type Default SqResult Sequence Result Variable – – SqStart Sequence Creation Variable – EXPR (Real Number)  Sres11 Calculation Result for StatGraph1 – – LIST {Real Number} Sres12 Calculation Result for StatGraph1 –...
  • Page 923 α -7-6 System Variable Table Name Description Input Delete Data Type Default Result of Inverse Cumulative – – EXPR(Real Number) Distribution Calculations Mean of Data 1 – – EXPR (Real Number) Graph Expression Input Variable,  100( FUNC  X= Type (Define) InvN Result of InvNorm Calculation...
  • Page 924 α -7-7 System Variable Table Name Description Input Delete Data Type Default View Window Display Range -axis ymax – EXPR (Real Number)  Maximum Value 3D Graph View Window Display ymax3D – EXPR (Real Number)  Range -axis Maximum Value View Window Display Range -axis ymin...
  • Page 925: Command And Function Index

    -8-1 Command and Function Index 8 Command and Function Index Command/Function Form Page Command/Function Form Page collect Func 2-8-5 abExpR 12-6-32 abExpReg 12-6-27 colNorm Func 2-8-38 Func 2-4-5 combine Func 2-8-5 absExpand Func 2-8-45 compToPol Func 2-8-21 2-8-46 compToTrig Func 2-8-21 andConnect Func...
  • Page 926 -8-2 Command and Function Index Command/Function Form Page Command/Function Form Page DispSmryTbl 12-6-16 fPDf Func 2-8-51 DispStat 2-8-55, frac Func 2-4-5 12-6-28 fRound Func 2-4-5 DispText 12-6-6 gamma Func 2-4-15 Distance 12-6-16 Func 2-8-18 Func 2-8-7 GeoCD 7-11-21 Do~LpWhile 12-6-9 geoCDf Func 2-8-54...
  • Page 927 -8-3 Command and Function Index Command/Function Form Page Command/Function Form Page InvGeoCD 7-11-22 Func 2-8-16 invGeoCDf Func 2-8-54 ModBox 12-6-32 invLaplace Func 2-8-8 mode Func 2-8-26 InvNorm 7-11-5 MoveVar 12-6-40 InvNormCD 7-11-5 mRow Func 2-8-36 invNormCDf Func 2-8-49 mRowAdd Func 2-8-37 InvPoissonCD 7-11-20...
  • Page 928 -8-4 Command and Function Index Command/Function Form Page Command/Function Form Page PlotChg 12-6-18 Rename 12-6-40 PlotOff 12-6-19 replace Func 2-8-47 PlotOn 12-6-19 Return 12-6-13 plotTest( Func 12-6-19 rewrite Func 2-8-44 PoissonCD 7-11-19 rFactor Func 2-8-5 poissonCDf Func 2-8-53 rotate Func 2-8-23 PoissonPD 7-11-18...
  • Page 929 -8-5 Command and Function Index Command/Function Form Page Command/Function Form Page SetNormal 12-6-36 StrJoin 12-6-43 SetRadian 12-6-36 StrLeft 12-6-43 SetReal 12-6-36 StrLen 12-6-43 SetSci 12-6-36 StrLwr 12-6-43 SetSequence 12-6-37 StrMid 12-6-43 SetSimulGraph 12-6-37 StrRight 12-6-43 SetSmryTable 12-6-37 StrRotate 12-6-44 SetSmryTableQD 12-6-37 StrShift 12-6-44...
  • Page 930 -8-6 Command and Function Index Command/Function Form Page Command/Function Form Page TwoSampleTInt 7-10-10 TwoSampleTTest 7-9-11 2-4-12 TwoSampleZInt 7-10-4 Func 2-4-10 TwoSampleZTest 7-9-5 Func 2-4-5 TwoVariable 12-6-32 Func 2-8-15 TwoWayANOVA 7-9-18 Func 2-8-15 unitV Func 2-8-39 Func 2-8-14 Unlock 12-6-41 A list Func 2-8-29 UnlockFolder...
  • Page 931: Graph Types And Executable Functions

    α -9-1 Graph Types and Executable Functions 9 Graph Types and Executable Functions −: Not executable : Executable D : Executable with some conditions  Graph Type � � � During During During Function Graphing Graphing Graphing Zoom � � � � � � �...
  • Page 932 α -9-2 Graph Types and Executable Functions Inequality Inequality Graph Type � � � During During During Function Graphing Graphing Graphing Zoom � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � Auto �...
  • Page 933 α -9-3 Graph Types and Executable Functions Statistical - Plot Graph Type − � � During During During Function Graphing Graphing Graphing Zoom − − � � � � − � � � � � − � � � � �...
  • Page 934 α -9-4 Graph Types and Executable Functions Statistical Regression Statistical - Box Conics Graph Type � � � During During During Function Graphing Graphing Graphing Zoom � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �...
  • Page 935: Error Message Table

    α -10-1 Error Message Table 10 Error Message Table k Error Message Table Error Message Description A single presentation can contain up to 60 – pages. Access to Flash ROM – Argument must be a variable name – Can’t Create – Can’t Delete – Can’t Edit –...
  • Page 936 α -10-2 Error Message Table Error Message Description Folder The folder name you specified for a command argument does not exist. Or you have input the name of a folder that cannot be specified (“library” folder, etc.) Function has invalid variable name –...
  • Page 937 α -10-3 Error Message Table Error Message Description Invalid Outside Function or Program You are trying to execute a command that must be used inside of a program as a local command, outside of a program. Invalid Path You are trying to specify an invalid path. This error occurs when you include a system folder in a path, when you include a system variable in a path, or when...
  • Page 938 α -10-4 Error Message Table Error Message Description Non-Real in Calc The ClassPad is in the Real mode but  the value you are inputting or the result produced by a calculation is a complex number. Not a Local Variable The variable you are trying to assign data to is not a local variable.
  • Page 939 α -10-5 Error Message Table k Warning Message Table Warning Message Description Batteries are extremely low! – Replace batteries immediately! Can’t Solve! – Can’t solve! NumSolve cannot solve an expression. Adjust initial value or bounds. Then try again. Insufficient memory for unit-to-unit communication. –...
  • Page 940 Manufacturer: CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. 6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan Responsible within the European Union: CASIO EUROPE GmbH Bornbarch 10 22848 Norderstedt, Germany This mark applies in EU countries only.
  • Page 941 CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. 6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan One or more of the following patents may be used in the product. U.S.Pats. 5,539,867 SA0802-A...

Table of Contents